Title 49: Transportation
Browse Previous
PART 571—FEDERAL MOTOR VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS
Section Contents
Subpart A—General
§ 571.1 Scope.
§ 571.3 Definitions.
§ 571.4 Explanation of usage.
§ 571.5 Matter incorporated by reference
§ 571.7 Applicability.
§ 571.8 Effective date.
§ 571.9 Separability.
§ 571.10 Designation of seating positions.
Subpart B—Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards
§ 571.101 Standard No. 101; Controls and displays.
§ 571.102 Standard No. 102; Transmission shift position sequence, starter interlock, and transmission braking effect.
§ 571.103 Standard No. 103; Windshield defrosting and defogging systems.
§ 571.104 Standard No. 104; Windshield wiping and washing systems.
§ 571.105 Standard No. 105; Hydraulic and electric brake systems.
§ 571.106 Standard No. 106; Brake hoses.
§ 571.107 [Reserved]
§ 571.108 Standard No. 108; Lamps, reflective devices, and associated equipment.
§ 571.109 Standard No. 109; New pneumatic and certain specialty tires.
§ 571.110 Tire selection and rims and motor home/recreation vehicle trailer load carrying capacity information for motor vehicles with a GVWR of 4,536 kilograms (10,000 pounds) or less.
§ 571.111 Standard No. 111; Rearview mirrors.
§ 571.112 [Reserved]
§ 571.113 Standard No. 113; Hood latch system.
§ 571.114 Standard No. 114; Theft protection and rollaway prevention.
§ 571.115 [Reserved]
§ 571.116 Standard No. 116; Motor vehicle brake fluids.
§ 571.117 Standard No. 117; Retreaded pneumatic tires.
§ 571.118 Standard No. 118; Power-operated window, partition, and roof panel systems.
§ 571.119 Standard No. 119; New pneumatic tires for motor vehicles with a GVWR of more than 4,536 kilograms (10,000 pounds) and motorcycles.
§ 571.120 Tire selection and rims and motor home/recreation vehicle trailer load carrying capacity information for motor vehicles with a GVWR of more than 4,536 kilograms (10,000 pounds).
§ 571.121 Standard No. 121; Air brake systems.
§ 571.122 Standard No. 122; Motorcycle brake systems.
§ 571.123 Standard No. 123; Motorcycle controls and displays.
§ 571.124 Standard No. 124; Accelerator control systems.
§ 571.125 Standard No. 125; Warning devices.
§ 571.126 Standard No. 126; Electronic stability control systems.
§§ 571.127-571.128 [Reserved]
§ 571.129 Standard No. 129; New non-pneumatic tires for passenger cars.
§ 571.131 Standard No. 131; School bus pedestrian safety devices.
§ 571.135 Standard No. 135; Light vehicle brake systems.
§ 571.138 Standard No. 138; Tire pressure monitoring systems.
§ 571.139 Standard No. 139; New pneumatic radial tires for light vehicles.
§ 571.201 Standard No. 201; Occupant protection in interior impact.
§ 571.202 Standard No. 202; Head restraints; Applicable at the manufacturers option until September 1, 2009.
§ 571.202a Standard No. 202a; Head restraints; Mandatory applicability begins on September 1, 2009.
§ 571.203 Standard No. 203; Impact protection for the driver from the steering control system.
§ 571.204 Standard No. 204; Steering control rearward displacement.
§ 571.205 Standard No. 205, Glazing materials.
§ 571.205(a) Glazing equipment manufactured before September 1, 2006 and glazing materials used in vehicles manufactured before November 1, 2006.
§ 571.206 Standard No. 206; Door locks and door retention components.
§ 571.207 Standard No. 207; Seating systems.
§ 571.208 Standard No. 208; Occupant crash protection.
§ 571.208a Optional test procedures for vehicles manufactured between January 27, 2004 and August 31, 2004.
§ 571.209 Standard No. 209; Seat belt assemblies.
§ 571.210 Standard No. 210; Seat belt assembly anchorages.
§ 571.211 [Reserved]
§ 571.212 Standard No. 212; Windshield mounting.
§ 571.213 Standard No. 213; Child restraint systems.
§ 571.214 Standard No. 214; Side impact protection.
§ 571.215 [Reserved]
§ 571.216 Standard No. 216; Roof crush resistance.
§ 571.216a Standard No. 216a; Roof crush resistance; Upgraded standard.
§ 571.217 Standard No. 217; Bus emergency exits and window retention and release.
§ 571.218 Standard No. 218; Motorcycle helmets.
§ 571.219 Standard No. 219; Windshield zone intrusion.
§ 571.220 Standard No. 220; School bus rollover protection.
§ 571.221 Standard No. 221; School bus body joint strength.
§ 571.222 Standard No. 222; School bus passenger seating and crash protection.
§ 571.223 Standard No. 223; Rear impact guards.
§ 571.224 Standard No. 224; Rear impact protection.
§ 571.225 Standard No. 225; Child restraint anchorage systems.
§ 571.301 Standard No. 301; Fuel system integrity.
§ 571.302 Standard No. 302; Flammability of interior materials.
§ 571.303 Standard No. 303; Fuel system integrity of compressed natural gas vehicles.
§ 571.304 Standard No. 304; Compressed natural gas fuel container integrity.
§ 571.305 Standard No. 305; Electric-powered vehicles: electrolyte spillage and electrical shock protection.
§ 571.401 Standard No. 401; Interior trunk release.
§ 571.403 Standard No. 403; Platform lift systems for motor vehicles.
§ 571.404 Standard No. 404; Platform lift installations in motor vehicles.
§ 571.500 Standard No. 500; Low-speed vehicles.
Authority:
49 U.S.C. 322, 30111, 30115, 30166 and 30177; delegation of authority at 49 CFR 1.50.
Editorial Note:
Nomenclature changes to part 571 appear at 69 FR 18803, Apr. 9, 2004.Subpart A—General
top§ 571.1 Scope.
top
This part contains the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards for motor vehicles and motor vehicle equipment established under section 103 of the National Traffic and Motor Vehicle Safety Act of 1966 (80 Stat. 718).
[33 FR 19703, Dec. 25, 1968. Redesignated at 35 FR 5118, Mar. 26, 1970]
§ 571.3 Definitions.
top (a) Statutory definitions. All terms defined in section 102 of the Act are used in their statutory meaning.
(b) Other definitions. As used in this chapter—
Act means the National Traffic and Motor Vehicle Safety Act of 1966 (80 Stat. 718).
Approved, unless used with reference to another person, means approved by the Secretary.
Boat trailer means a trailer designed with cradle-type mountings to transport a boat and configured to permit launching of the boat from the rear of the trailer.
Bus means a motor vehicle with motive power, except a trailer, designed for carrying more than 10 persons.
Curb weight means the weight of a motor vehicle with standard equipment; maximum capacity of engine fuel, oil, and coolant; and, if so equipped, air conditioning and additional weight optional engine.
Designated seating capacity means the number of designated seating positions provided.
Designated seating position means:
(1) For vehicles manufactured prior to September 1, 2010, any plan view location capable of accommodating a person at least as large as a 5th percentile adult female, if the overall seat configuration and design and vehicle design is such that the position is likely to be used as a seating position while the vehicle is in motion, except for auxiliary seating accommodations such as temporary or folding jump seats. Any bench or split-bench seat in a passenger car, truck or multipurpose passenger vehicle with a GVWR less than 4,536 kilograms (10,000 pounds), having greater than 127 centimeters (50 inches) of hip room (measured in accordance with Society of Automotive Engineers (SAE) Recommended Practice J1100a, revised September 1975, “Motor Vehicle Dimensions” (incorporated by reference, see §571.5), shall have not less than three designated seating positions, unless the seat design or vehicle design is such that the center position cannot be used for seating. For the sole purpose of determining the classification of any vehicle sold or introduced into interstate commerce for purposes that include carrying students to and from school or related events, any location in such vehicle intended for securement of an occupied wheelchair during vehicle operation shall be regarded as four designated seating positions.
(2) For vehicles manufactured on and after September 1, 2010, designated seating position means a seat location that has a seating surface width, as described in §571.10(c) of this part, of at least 330 mm (13 inches). The number of designated seating positions at a seat location is determined according to the procedure set forth in §571.10(b) of this part. However, for trucks and multipurpose passenger vehicles with a gross vehicle weight rating greater than 10,000 lbs, police vehicles as defined in S7 of FMVSS No. 208, firefighting vehicles, ambulances, and motor homes, a seating location that is labeled in accordance with S4.4 of FMVSS No. 207 will not be considered a designated seating position. For the sole purpose of determining the classification of any vehicle sold or introduced into interstate commerce for purposes that include carrying students to and from school or related events, any location in such a vehicle intended for securement of an occupied wheelchair during vehicle operation is regarded as four designated seating positions.
Driver means the occupant of a motor vehicle seated immediately behind the steering control system.
Emergency brake means a mechanism designed to stop a motor vehicle after a failure of the service brake system.
5th percentile adult female means a person possessing the dimensions and weight of the 5th percentile adult female specified for the total age group in “Weight, Height, and Selected Body Dimensions of Adults: United States—1960–1962,” first published as Public Health Service Publication No. 1000 Series 11–No. 8, June 1965 and republished as DHEW Publication No. (HRA) 76–1074 (incorporated by reference, see §571.5).
Firefighting vehicle means a vehicle designed exclusively for the purpose of fighting fires.
Fixed collision barrier means a flat, vertical, unyielding surface with the following characteristics:
(1) The surface is sufficiently large that when struck by a tested vehicle, no portion of the vehicle projects or passes beyond the surface.
(2) The approach is a horizontal surface that is large enough for the vehicle to attain a stable attitude during its approach to the barrier, and that does not restrict vehicle motion during impact.
(3) When struck by a vehicle, the surface and its supporting structure absorb no significant portion of the vehicle's kinetic energy, so that a performance requirement described in terms of impact with a fixed collision barrier must be met no matter how small an amount of energy is absorbed by the barrier.
Forward control means a configuration in which more than half of the engine length is rearward of the foremost point of the windshield base and the steering wheel hub is in the forward quarter of the vehicle length.
Full trailer means a trailer, except a pole trailer, that is equipped with two or more axles that support the entire weight of the trailer.
Gross axle weight rating or GAWR means the value specified by the vehicle manufacturer as the load-carrying capacity of a single axle system, as measured at the tire-ground interfaces.
Gross combination weight rating or GCWR means the value specified by the manufacturer as the loaded weight of a combination vehicle.
Gross vehicle weight rating or GVWR means the value specified by the manufacturer as the loaded weight of a single vehicle.
H-Point means the pivot center of the torso and thigh on the three-dimensional device used in defining and measuring vehicle seating accommodation, as defined in Society of Automotive Engineers (SAE) Recommended Practice J1100, revised February 2001, “Motor Vehicle Dimensions” (incorporated by reference, see §571.5).
Head impact area means all nonglazed surfaces of the interior of a vehicle that are statically contactable by a 6.5-inch diameter spherical head form of a measuring device having a pivot point to “top-of-head” dimension infinitely adjustable from 29 to 33 inches in accordance with the following procedure, or its graphic equivalent:
(a) At each designated seating position, place the pivot point of the measuring device—
(1) For seats that are adjustable fore and aft, at—
(i) The seating reference point; and
(ii) A point 5 inches horizontally forward of the seating reference point and vertically above the seating reference point an amount equal to the rise which results from a 5–inch forward adjustment of the seat or 0.75 inch; and
(2) For seats that are not adjustable fore and aft, at the seating reference point.
(b) With the pivot point to “top-of-head” dimension at each value allowed by the device and the interior dimensions of the vehicle, determine all contact points above the lower windshield glass line and forward of the seating reference point.
(c) With the head form at each contact point, and with the device in a vertical position if no contact points exists for a particular adjusted length, pivot the measuring device forward and downward through all arcs in vertical planes to 90° each side of the vertical longitudinal plane through the seating reference point, until the head form contacts an interior surface or until it is tangent to a horizontal plane 1 inch above the seating reference point, whichever occurs first.
Interior compartment door means any door in the interior of the vehicle installed by the manufacturer as a cover for storage space normally used for personal effects.
Longitudinal or longitudinally means parallel to the longitudinal centerline of the vehicle.
Low-speed vehicle (LSV) means a motor vehicle,
(1) That is 4-wheeled,
(2) Whose speed attainable in 1.6 km (1 mile) is more than 32 kilometers per hour (20 miles per hour) and not more than 40 kilometers per hour (25 miles per hour) on a paved level surface, and
(3) Whose GVWR is less than 1,361 kilograms (3,000 pounds).
Motorcycle means a motor vehicle with motive power having a seat or saddle for the use of the rider and designed to travel on not more than three wheels in contact with the ground.
Motor-driven cycle means a motorcycle with a motor that produces 5-brake horsepower or less.
Motor home means a multi-purpose vehicle with motive power that is designed to provide temporary residential accommodations, as evidenced by the presence of at least four of the following facilities: cooking; refrigeration or ice box; self-contained toilet; heating and/or air conditioning; a potable water supply system including a faucet and a sink; and a separate 110–125 volt electrical power supply and/or propane.
Multifunction school activity bus (MFSAB) means a school bus whose purposes do not include transporting students to and from home or school bus stops.
Multipurpose passenger vehicle means a motor vehicle with motive power, except a low-speed vehicle or trailer, designed to carry 10 persons or less which is constructed either on a truck chassis or with special features for occasional off-road operation.
Open-body type vehicle means a vehicle having no occupant compartment top or an occupant compartment top that can be installed or removed by the user at his convenience.
Outboard designated seating position means a designated seating position where a longitudinal vertical plane tangent to the outboard side of the seat cushion is less than 12 inches from the innermost point on the inside surface of the vehicle at a height between the design H-point and the shoulder reference point (as shown in fig. 1 of Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 210) and longitudinally between the front and rear edges of the seat cushion.
Overall vehicle width means the nominal design dimension of the widest part of the vehicle, exclusive of signal lamps, marker lamps, outside rearview mirrors, flexible fender extensions, and mud flaps, determined with doors and windows closed and the wheels in the straight-ahead position.
Parking brake means a mechanism designed to prevent the movement of a stationary motor vehicle.
Passenger car means a motor vehicle with motive power, except a low-speed vehicle, multipurpose passenger vehicle, motorcycle, or trailer, designed for carrying 10 persons or less.
Pelvic impact area means that area of the door or body side panel adjacent to any outboard designated seating position which is bounded by horizontal planes 7 inches above and 4 inches below the seating reference point and vertical transverse planes 8 inches forward and 2 inches rearward of the seating reference point.
Pole trailer means a motor vehicle without motive power designed to be drawn by another motor vehicle and attached to the towing vehicle by means of a reach or pole, or by being boomed or otherwise secured to the towing vehicle, for transporting long or irregularly shaped loads such as poles, pipes, or structural members capable generally of sustaining themselves as beams between the supporting connections.
Recreation vehicle trailer means a trailer, except a trailer designed primarily to transport cargo, designed to be drawn by a vehicle with motive power by means of a bumper, frame or fifth wheel hitch and designed to provide temporary residential accommodations, as evidenced by the presence of at least four of the following facilities: cooking; refrigeration or ice box; self-contained toilet; heating and/or air conditioning; a potable water supply system including a faucet and a sink; and a separate 110–125 volt electrical power supply and/or propane. “Recreation vehicle trailer” includes trailers used for personal purposes, commonly known as “sport utility RVs” or “toy haulers,” which usually have spacious rather than incidental living quarters and provide a cargo area for smaller items for personal use such as motorcycles, mountain bikes, all terrain vehicles (ATVs), snowmobiles, canoes or other types of recreational gear.
School bus means a bus that is sold, or introduced in interstate commerce, for purposes that include carrying students to and from school or related events, but does not include a bus designed and sold for operation as a common carrier in urban transportation.
Seating reference point (SgRP) means the unique design H-point, as defined in Society of Automotive Engineers (SAE) Recommended Practice J1100, revised June 1984, “Motor Vehicle Dimensions” (incorporated by reference, see §571.5), which:
(1) Establishes the rearmost normal design driving or riding position of each designated seating position, which includes consideration of all modes of adjustment, horizontal, vertical, and tilt, in a vehicle;
(2) Has X, Y, and Z coordinates, as defined in Society of Automotive Engineers (SAE) Recommended Practice J1100, revised June 1984, “Motor Vehicle Dimensions” (incorporated by reference, see §571.5), established relative to the designed vehicle structure;
(3) Simulates the position of the pivot center of the human torso and thigh; and
(4) Is the reference point employed to position the two-dimensional drafting template with the 95th percentile leg described in Society of Automotive Engineers (SAE) Standard J826, revised May 1987, “Devices for Use in Defining and Measuring Vehicle Seating Accommodation” (incorporated by reference, see §571.5), or, if the drafting template with the 95th percentile leg cannot be positioned in the seating position, is located with the seat in its most rearward adjustment position.
Semitrailer means a trailer, except a pole trailer, so constructed that a substantial part of its weight rests upon or is carried by another motor vehicle.
Service brake means the primary mechanism designed to stop a motor vehicle.
Speed attainable in 1 mile means the speed attainable by accelerating at maximum rate from a standing start for 1 mile, on a level surface.
Speed attainable in 2 miles means the speed attainable by accelerating at maximum rate from a standing start for 2 miles, on a level surface.
Torso line means the line connecting the “H” point and the shoulder reference point as defined in Society of Automotive Engineers (SAE) Standard J787b, revised September 1966, “Motor Vehicle Seat Belt Anchorage” (incorporated by reference, see §571.5).
Trailer means a motor vehicle with or without motive power, designed for carrying persons or property and for being drawn by another motor vehicle.
Trailer converter dolly means a trailer chassis equipped with one or more axles, a lower half of a fifth wheel and a drawbar.
Truck means a motor vehicle with motive power, except a trailer, designed primarily for the transportation of property or special purpose equipment.
Truck tractor means a truck designed primarily for drawing other motor vehicles and not so constructed as to carry a load other than a part of the weight of the vehicle and the load so drawn.
Unloaded vehicle weight means the weight of a vehicle with maximum capacity of all fluids necessary for operation of the vehicle, but without cargo, occupants, or accessories that are ordinarily removed from the vehicle when they are not in use.
95th percentile adult male means a person possessing the dimensions and weight of the 95th percentile adult male specified “Weight, Height, and Selected Body Dimensions of Adults: United States—1960–1962,” first published as Public Health Service Publication No. 1000 Series 11-No. 8, June 1965 and republished as DHEW Publication No. (HRA) 76–1074 (incorporated by reference, see §571.5).
Vehicle fuel tank capacity means the tank's unusable capacity (i.e., the volume of fuel left at the bottom of the tank when the vehicle's fuel pump can no longer draw fuel from the tank) plus its usable capacity (i.e., the volume of fuel that can be pumped into the tank through the filler pipe with the vehicle on a level surface and with the unusable capacity already in the tank). The term does not include the vapor volume of the tank (i.e., the space above the fuel tank filler neck) nor the volume of the fuel tank filler neck.
(c) Any State requirement, including any determination under State tort law premised on there being more designated seating positions in a motor vehicle than the number contemplated in the definition of “designated seating position” in paragraph (b) of this section would prevent, hinder or frustrate the accomplishment of the purposes of the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards in Part 571 of this title, and is thus preempted by this regulation.
[33 FR 19703, Dec. 25, 1968. Redesignated at 35 FR 5118, Mar. 26, 1970]
Editorial Note:
ForFederal Registercitations affecting §571.3, see the List of CFR Sections Affected, which appears in the Finding Aids section of the printed volume and on GPO Access.§ 571.4 Explanation of usage.
top
The word any, used in connection with a range of values or set of items in the requirements, conditions, and procedures of the standards or regulations in this chapter, means generally the totality of the items or values, any one of which may be selected by the Administration for testing, except where clearly specified otherwise.
Examples:
“The vehicle shall meet the requirements of S4.1 when tested at any point between 18 and 22 inches above the ground.” This means that the vehicle must be capable of meeting the specified requirements at every point between 18 and 22 inches above the ground. The test in question for a given vehicle may call for a single test (a single impact, for example), but the vehicle must meet the requirement at whatever point the Administration selects, within the specified range. “Each tire shall be capable of meeting the requirements of this standard when mounted on any rim specified by the manufacturer as suitable for use with that tire.” This means that, where the manufacturer specifies more than one rim as suitable for use with a tire, the tire must meet the requirements with whatever rim the Administration selects from the specified group.
“Any one of the items listed below may, at the option of the manufacturer, be substituted for the hardware specified in S4.1.” Here the wording clearly indicates that the selection of items is at the manufacturer's option.
[36 FR 2511, Feb. 5, 1971]
§ 571.5 Matter incorporated by reference
top (a) Documents listed in this section and additional documents referred to in subpart B of this part have been incorporated by reference into this part. The Director of the Federal Register approved the incorporation by reference as prescribed in 5 U.S.C. 552(a) and 1 CFR part 51. For materials subject to change, only the specific version approved by the Director of the Federal Register and specified in this section or in subpart B of this part are incorporated. A notice of any change in these materials will be published in theFederal Register.Anyone may inspect copies at the NHTSA Reading Room, 1200 New Jersey Avenue, Washington, DC 20590 and at the National Archives and Records Administration (NARA). For information on the availability of this material at NARA, call 202–741–6030, or go to: http://www.archives.gov/federal_register/code_of_federal_regulations/ibr_locations.html . Approved materials are available from the sources indicated in paragraph (b) of this section.
(b) The materials approved for incorporation by reference in this part and the sections and paragraphs (if applicable) affected include, but are not limited to, as follows:
| American Association of Textile Chemists and Colorists (AATCC), 1 Davis Dr., P.O. Box 12215, Research Triangle Park, NC 27709 | |
| American National Standards Institute (ANSI), 1700 North Moore St., Suite 1540, Arlington, VA 22209–1903 | |
| American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM), 100 Barr Harbor Drive, P.O. Box C700, West Conshohocken, PA 19428–2959 | |
| General Services Administration (GSA), Superintendent of Documents, U.S. Government Printing Office, Washington, DC 20402 | |
| Illuminating Engineering Society of North America (IES), 120 Wall St., 7th Floor, New York, NY 10005 | |
| Department of Defense, DODSSP Standardization Document Order Desk, 700 Robbins Ave., Philadelphia, PA 19111–5098 | |
| National Center for Health Statistics, Centers for Disease Control (CDC), National Division for Health Statistics, Division of Data Services, Hyattsville, MD 20782. Phone: 1–800–232–4636; Web: http://www.cdc.gov/nchs | |
| “Weight, Height, and Selected Body Dimensions of Adults: United States—1960–1962,” first published as Public Health Service Publication No. 1000 Series 11-No. 8, June 1965 and republished as DHEW Publication No. (HRA) 76–1074 | 571.3 |
| National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA), Office of Vehicle Safety Standards, DOT–NHTSA, 1200 New Jersey Ave, SE., Washington, DC 20590 | |
| Society of Automotive Engineers, Inc. (SAE), 400 Commonwealth Drive, Warrendale, Pennsylvania 15096. Phone: 1–724–776–4841; Web: http://www.sae.org | |
| Society of Automotive Engineers (SAE) Standard J787b, revised September 1966, “Motor Vehicle Seat Belt Anchorage” | 571.3 |
| Society of Automotive Engineers (SAE) Standard J826, revised May 1987, “Devices for Use in Defining and Measuring Vehicle Seating Accommodation” | 571.3; 571.210 |
| Society of Automotive Engineers (SAE) Recommended Practice J1100a, revised September 1975, “Motor Vehicle Dimensions” | 571.3 |
| Society of Automotive Engineers (SAE) Recommended Practice J1100, revised June 1984, “Motor Vehicle Dimensions” | 571.3; 571.210 |
| Society of Automotive Engineers (SAE) Recommended Practice J1100, revised February 2001, “Motor Vehicle Dimensions” | 571.3 |
| Society of Automotive Engineers (SAE) Surface Vehicle Standard J826, revised July 1995, “Devices for Use in Defining and Measuring Vehicle Seating Accommodation” | 571.10 |
| United Nations, Conference Services Division, Distribution and Sales Section, Office C.115–1, Palais des Nations, CH–1211, Geneva 10, Switzerland. Copies of Regulations also are available on the ECE internet Web site: www.unece.org/trans/main/wp29/wp29regs.html | |
[73 FR 58896, Oct. 8, 2008]
§ 571.7 Applicability.
top (a) General. Except as provided in paragraphs (c) and (d) of this section, each standard set forth in subpart B of this part applies according to its terms to all motor vehicles or items of motor vehicle equipment the manufacture of which is completed on or after the effective date of the standard.
(b) [Reserved]
(c) Military vehicles. No standard applies to a vehicle or item of equipment manufactured for, and sold directly to, the Armed Forces of the United States in conformity with contractual specifications.
(d) Export. No standard applies to a vehicle or item of equipment in the circumstances provided in section 108(b)(5) of the Act (15 U.S.C. 1397 (b)(5)).
(e) Combining new and used components. When a new cab is used in the assembly of a truck, the truck will be considered newly manufactured for purposes of paragraph (a) of this section, the application of the requirements of this chapter, and the Act, unless the engine, transmission, and drive axle(s) (as a minimum) of the assembled vehicle are not new, and at least two of these components were taken from the same vehicle.
(f) Combining new and used components in trailer manufacture. When new materials are used in the assembly of a trailer, the trailer will be considered newly manufactured for purposes of paragraph (a) of this section, the application of the requirements of this chapter, and the Act, unless, at a minimum, the trailer running gear assembly (axle(s), wheels, braking and suspension) is not new, and was taken from an existing trailer—
(1) Whose identity is continued in the reassembled vehicle with respect to the Vehicle Identification Number; and
(2) That is owned or leased by the user of the reassembled vehicle.
[33 FR 19703, Dec. 25, 1968. Redesignated at 35 FR 5118, Mar. 26, 1970, and amended at 36 FR 7855, Apr. 27, 1971; 38 FR 12808, May 16, 1973; 40 FR 49341, Oct. 22, 1975; 41 FR 27074, July 1, 1976]
§ 571.8 Effective date.
top (a) Firefighting vehicles. Notwithstanding the effective date provisions of the motor vehicle safety standards in this part, the effective date of any standard or amendment of a standard issued after September 1, 1971, to which firefighting vehicles must conform shall be, with respect to such vehicles, either 2 years after the date on which such standard or amendment is published in the rules and regulations section of theFederal Register,or the effective date specified in the notice, whichever is later, except as such standard or amendment may otherwise specifically provide with respect to firefighting vehicles.
(b) Vehicles built in two or more stages vehicles and altered vehicles. Unless Congress directs or the agency expressly determines that this paragraph does not apply, the date for manufacturer certification of compliance with any standard, or amendment to a standard, that is issued on or after September 1, 2006 is, insofar as its application to intermediate and final-stage manufacturers and alterers is concerned, one year after the last applicable date for manufacturer certification of compliance. Nothing in this provision shall be construed as prohibiting earlier compliance with the standard or amendment or as precluding NHTSA from extending a compliance effective date for intermediate and final-stage manufacturers and alterers by more than one year.
[70 FR 7435, Feb. 14, 2005]
§ 571.9 Separability.
top If any standard established in this part or its application to any person or circumstance is held invalid, the remainder of the part and the application of that standard to other persons or circumstances is not affected thereby.
[33 FR 19705, Dec. 25, 1968. Redesignated at 35 FR 5118, Mar. 26, 1970]
§ 571.10 Designation of seating positions.
top (a) Application. This section applies to passenger cars, trucks, multipurpose passenger vehicles, and buses manufactured on or after September 1, 2010. However, paragraph (b) of this section does not apply to trucks and multipurpose passenger vehicles with a gross vehicle weight rating greater than 10,000 lbs, school buses, police vehicles as defined in S7 of Standard No. 208 (49 CFR 571.208), firefighting vehicles, ambulances, or motor homes. To determine the number of passenger seating positions in school buses, see S4.1 of Standard No. 222 (49 CFR 571.222).
(b) Number of designated seating positions. The formula for calculating the number of designated seating positions (N) for any seat location with a seating surface width greater than 330 mm (13 inches) is as follows:
(1) For seat locations with a seating surface width, as described in paragraph (d), of less than 1400 mm (55.2 inches): N = [Seating surface width (in mm)/350] round down to the nearest whole number;
(2) For seat locations with a seating surface width, as described in paragraph (d), greater than or equal to 1400 mm (55.2 inches): N = [Seating surface width (in mm)/450] round down to the nearest whole number.
(c) Seating surface measurement. (1) As used in this section, “seating surface width” is the maximum width of a seating surface measured in a zone extending from a transverse vertical plane 150 mm (5.9 inches) behind the front leading surface of that seating surface to a transverse vertical plane 250 mm (9.8 inches) behind that front leading surface, measured horizontally and longitudinally.
(2) Adjacent seating surfaces are considered to form a single, continuous seating surface whose overall width is measured as specified in (c)(1) of this section, unless
(i) The seating surfaces are separated by:
(A) A fixed trimmed surface whose top surface is unpadded and that has a width not less than 140 mm (5.5 inches), as measured in each transverse vertical plane within that measurement zone, or
(B) A void whose cross section in each transverse vertical plane within that measurement zone is a rectangle that is not less than 140 mm (5.5 inches) wide and not less than 140 mm (5.5 inches) deep. The top edge of the cross section in any such plane is congruent with the transverse horizontal line that intersects the lowest point on the portion of the top profile of the seating surfaces that lie within that plane, or
(ii) Interior trim interrupts the measurement of the nominal hip room of the seating surfaces, measured laterally along the “X” plane through the H-point. For purposes of this paragraph, the H-point is located using the SAE three-dimensional H-point machine per Society of Automotive Engineers (SAE) Surface Vehicle Standard J826, revised July 1995, “Devices for Use in Defining and Measuring Vehicle Seating Accommodation” (incorporated by reference, see section 571.5) with the legs and leg weights removed, or
(iii) The seating surfaces are adjacent outboard seats, and the lateral distance between any point on the seat cushion of one seat and any point on the seat cushion of the other seat is not less than 140 mm (5.5 inches).
(3) Folding, removable, and adjustable seats are measured in the configuration that results in the single largest maximum seating surface width.
[73 FR 58897, Oct. 8, 2008]
Subpart B—Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards
topSource:
36 FR 22902, Dec. 2, 1971, unless otherwise noted.§ 571.101 Standard No. 101; Controls and displays.
top
Link to an amendment published at 74 FR 40764, Aug. 13, 2009.
S1. Scope. This standard specifies performance requirements for location, identification, color, and illumination of motor vehicle controls, telltales and indicators.
S2. Purpose. The purpose of this standard is to ensure the accessibility, visibility and recognition of motor vehicle controls, telltales and indicators, and to facilitate the proper selection of controls under daylight and nighttime conditions, in order to reduce the safety hazards caused by the diversion of the driver's attention from the driving task, and by mistakes in selecting controls.
S3. Application. This standard applies to passenger cars, multipurpose passenger vehicles, trucks, and buses.
S4. Definitions.
Adjacent, with respect to a control, telltale or indicator, and its identifier means:
(a) The identifier is in close proximity to the control, telltale or indicator; and
(b) No other control, telltale, indicator, identifier or source of illumination appears between the identifier and the telltale, indicator, or control that the identifier identifies.
Common space means an area on which more than one telltale, indicator, identifier, or other message may be displayed, but not simultaneously.
Control means the hand-operated part of a device that enables the driver to change the state or functioning of the vehicle or a vehicle subsystem.
Indicator means a device that shows the magnitude of the physical characteristics that the instrument is designed to sense.
Identifier means a symbol, word, or words used to identify a control, telltale, or indicator.
Multi-function control means a control through which the driver may select, and affect the operation of, more than one vehicle function.
Multi-task display means a display on which more than one message can be shown simultaneously.
Telltale means an optical signal that, when illuminated, indicates the actuation of a device, a correct or improper functioning or condition, or a failure to function.
S5. Requirements. Each passenger car, multipurpose passenger vehicle, truck and bus that is fitted with a control, a telltale or an indicator listed in Table 1 or Table 2 must meet the requirements of this standard for the location, identification, color, and illumination of that control, telltale or indicator. However, the requirements for telltales and indicators do not apply to vehicles with GVWRs of 4,536 kg or greater if these specified vehicles are manufactured before September 1, 2013.
S5.1 Location
S5.1.1 The controls listed in Table 1 and in Table 2 must be located so they are operable by the driver under the conditions of S5.6.2.
S5.1.2 The telltales and indicators listed in Table 1 and Table 2 and their identification must be located so that, when activated, they are visible to a driver under the conditions of S5.6.1 and S5.6.2.
S5.1.3 Except as provided in S5.1.4, the identification for controls, telltales and indicators must be placed on or adjacent to the telltale, indicator or control that it identifies.
S5.1.4 The requirement of S5.1.3 does not apply to a multi-function control, provided the multi-function control is associated with a multi-task display that:
(a) Is visible to the driver under the conditions of S5.6.1 and S5.6.2,
(b) Identifies the multi-function control with which it is associated graphically or using words,
(c) For multi-task displays with layers, identifies on the top-most layer each system for which control is possible from the associated multi-function control, including systems not otherwise regulated by this standard. Subfunctions of the available systems need not be shown on the top-most layer of the multi-task display, and
(d) Identifies the controls of Table 1 and Table 2 with the identification specified in those tables or otherwise required by this standard, whenever those are the active functions of the multi-function control. For lower levels of multi-task displays with layers, identification is permitted but not required for systems not otherwise regulated by this standard.
(e) Does not display telltales listed in Table 1 or Table 2.
S5.2 Identification
S5.2.1 Except for the Low Tire Pressure Telltale, each control, telltale and indicator that is listed in column 1 of Table 1 or Table 2 must be identified by the symbol specified for it in column 2 or the word or abbreviation specified for it in column 3 of Table 1 or Table 2. If a symbol is used, each symbol provided pursuant to this paragraph must be substantially similar in form to the symbol as it appears in Table 1 or Table 2. If a symbol is used, each symbol provided pursuant to this paragraph must have the proportional dimensional characteristics of the symbol as it appears in Table 1 or Table 2. The Low Tire Pressure Telltale (either the display identifying which tire has low pressure or the display which does not identify which tire has low pressure) shall be identified by the appropriate symbol designated in column 4, or both the symbol in column 4 and the words in column 3. No identification is required for any horn ( i.e. , audible warning signal) that is activated by a lanyard or for a turn signal control that is operated in a plane essentially parallel to the face plane of the steering wheel in its normal driving position and which is located on the left side of the steering column so that it is the control on that side of the column nearest to the steering wheel face plane.
S5.2.2 Any symbol, word, or abbreviation not shown in Table 1 or Table 2 may be used to identify a control, a telltale or an indicator that is not listed in those tables.
S5.2.3 Supplementary symbols, words, or abbreviations may be used at the manufacturer's discretion in conjunction with any symbol, word, or abbreviation specified in Table 1 or Table 2.
S5.2.4 [Reserved]
S5.2.5 A single symbol, word, or abbreviation may be used to identify any combination of the control, indicator, and telltale for the same function.
S5.2.6 Except as provided in S5.2.7, all identifications of telltales, indicators and controls listed in Table 1 or Table 2 must appear to the driver to be perceptually upright. A rotating control that has an “off” position shall appear to the driver perceptually upright when the rotating control is in the “off” position.
S5.2.7 The identification of the following items need not appear to the driver to be perceptually upright:
(a) A horn control;
(b) Any control, telltale or indicator located on the steering wheel, when the steering wheel is positioned for the motor vehicle to travel in a direction other than straight forward; and
(c) Any rotating control that does not have an “off” position.
S5.2.8 Each control for an automatic vehicle speed system (cruise control) and each control for heating and air conditioning systems must have identification provided for each function of each such system.
S5.2.9 Each control that regulates a system function over a continuous range must have identification provided for the limits of the adjustment range of that function. If color coding is used to identify the limits of the adjustment range of a temperature function, the hot limit must be identified by the color red and the cold limit by the color blue. If the status or limit of a function is shown by a display not adjacent to the control for that function, both the control (unless it is a multi-function control complying with S5.1.4) and the display must be independently identified as to the function of the control, in compliance with S5.2.1, on or adjacent to the control and on or adjacent to the display.
Example 1.
A slide lever controls the temperature of the air in the vehicle heating system over a continuous range, from no heat to maximum heat. Since the control regulates a single function over a quantitative range, only the extreme positions require identification.
Example 2.
A switch has three positions, for heat, defrost, and air conditioning. Since each position regulates a different function, each position must be identified.
S5.3 Illumination
S5.3.1 Timing of illumination
(a) Except as provided in S5.3.1(c), the identifications of controls for which the word “Yes” is specified in column 5 of Table 1 must be capable of being illuminated whenever the headlamps are activated. This requirement does not apply to a control located on the floor, floor console, steering wheel, steering column, or in the area of windshield header, or to a control for a heating and air-conditioning system that does not direct air upon the windshield.
(b) Except as provided in S5.3.1(c), the indicators and their identifications for which the word “Yes” is specified in column 5 of Table 1 must be illuminated whenever the vehicle's propulsion system and headlamps are activated.
(c) The indicators, their identifications and the identifications of controls need not be illuminated when the headlamps are being flashed or operated as daytime running lamps.
(d) At the manufacturer's option, any control, indicator, or their identifications may be capable of being illuminated at any time.
(e) A telltale must not emit light except when identifying the malfunction or vehicle condition it is designed to indicate, or during a bulb check.
S5.3.2 Brightness of illumination of controls and indicators
S5.3.2.1 Means must be provided for illuminating the indicators, identifications of indicators and identifications of controls listed in Table 1 to make them visible to the driver under daylight and nighttime driving conditions.
S5.3.2.2 The means of providing the visibility required by S5.3.2.1:
(a) Must be adjustable to provide at least two levels of brightness;
(b) At a level of brightness other than the highest level, the identification of controls and indicators must be barely discernible to the driver who has adapted to dark ambient roadway condition;
(c) May be operable manually or automatically; and
(d) May have levels of brightness, other than the two required visible levels of brightness, at which those items and identification are not visible.
(1) If the level of brightness is adjusted by automatic means to a point where those items or their identification are not visible to the driver, means shall be provided to enable the driver to restore visibility.
S5.3.3 Brightness of telltale illumination
(a) Means must be provided for illuminating telltales and their identification sufficiently to make them visible to the driver under daylight and nighttime driving conditions.
(b) The means for providing the required visibility may be adjustable manually or automatically, except that the telltales and identification for brakes, highbeams, turn signals, and safety belts may not be adjustable under any driving condition to a level that is invisible.
S5.3.4 Brightness of interior lamps. (a) Any source of illumination within the passenger compartment which is forward of a transverse vertical plane 110 mm rearward of the manikin “H” point with the driver's seat in its rearmost driving position, which is not used for the controls and displays regulated by this standard, which is not a telltale, and which is capable of being illuminated while the vehicle is in motion, shall have either:
(1) Light intensity which is manually or automatically adjustable to provide at least two levels of brightness;
(2) A single intensity that is barely discernible to a driver who has adapted to dark ambient roadway conditions;or
(3) A means of being turned off.
(b) Paragraph (a) of S5.3.4 does not apply to buses that are normally operated with the passenger compartment illuminated.
S5.3.5 The provisions of S5.3.4 do not apply to buses that are normally operated with the passenger compartment illuminated.
S5.4 Color
S5.4.1 The light of each telltale listed in Table 1 must be of the color specified for that telltale in column 6 of that table.
S5.4.2 Any indicator or telltale not listed in Table 1 and any identification of that indicator or telltale must not be a color that masks the driver's ability to recognize any telltale, control, or indicator listed in Table 1.
S5.4.3 Each symbol used for the identification of a telltale, control or indicator must be in a color that stands out clearly against the background. For vehicles with a GVWR of under 4,536 kg (10,000 pounds), the compliance date for this provision is September 1, 2011.
S5.4.4 The filled-in part of any symbol in Table 1 or Table 2 may be replaced by its outline and the outline of any symbol in Table 1 or Table 2 may be filled in.
S5.5 Common space for displaying multiple messages
S5.5.1 A common space may be used to show messages from any sources, subject to the requirements in S5.5.2 through S5.5.6.
S5.5.2 The telltales for any brake system malfunction required by Table 1 to be red, air bag malfunction, low tire pressure, electronic stability control malfunction (as of September 1, 2011), passenger air bag off, high beam, turn signal, and seat belt must not be shown in the same common space.
S5.5.3 The telltales and indicators that are listed in Table 1 and are shown in the common space must illuminate at the initiation of any underlying condition.
S5.5.4 Except as provided in S5.5.5, when the underlying conditions exist for actuation of two or more telltales, the messages must be either:
(a) Repeated automatically in sequence, or
(b) Indicated by visible means and capable of being selected for viewing by the driver under the conditions of S5.6.2.
S5.5.5 In the case of the telltale for a brake system malfunction, air bag malfunction, side air bag malfunction, low tire pressure, electronic stability control malfunction (as of September 1, 2011), passenger air bag off, high beam, turn signal, or seat belt that is designed to display in a common space, that telltale must displace any other symbol or message in that common space while the underlying condition for the telltale's activation exists.
S5.5.6(a) Except as provided in S5.5.6(b), messages displayed in a common space may be cancelable automatically or by the driver.
(b) Telltales for high beams, turn signal, low tire pressure, and passenger air bag off, and telltales for which the color red is required in Table 1 must not be cancelable while the underlying condition for their activation exists.
S5.6 Conditions
S5.6.1 The driver has adapted to the ambient light roadway conditions.
S5.6.2 The driver is restrained by the seat belts installed in accordance with 49 CFR 571.208 and adjusted in accordance with the vehicle manufacturer's instructions.
View or download PDF
View or download PDF
View or download PDF
View or download PDF
View or download PDF[70 FR 48305, Aug. 17, 2005, as amended at 71 FR 27971, May 15, 2006; 72 FR 17305, Apr. 6, 2007; 73 FR 54537, Sept. 22, 2008]
§ 571.102 Standard No. 102; Transmission shift position sequence, starter interlock, and transmission braking effect.
top S1. Purpose and scope. This standard specifies the requirements for the transmission shift position sequence, a starter interlock, and for a braking effect of automatic transmissions, to reduce the likelihood of shifting errors, to prevent starter engagement by the driver when the transmission is in any drive position, and to provide supplemental braking at speeds below 40 kilometers per hour (25 miles per hour).
S2. Application. This standard applies to passenger cars, multi-purpose passenger vehicles, trucks, and buses.
S3. Requirements.
S3.1 Automatic transmissions.
S3.1.1 Location of transmission shift positions on passenger cars. A neutral position shall be located between forward drive and reverse drive positions.
S3.1.1.1 Transmission shift levers. If a steering-column-mounted transmission shift lever is used, movement from neutral position to forward drive position shall be clockwise. If the transmission shift lever sequence includes a park position, it shall be located at the end, adjacent to the reverse drive position.
S3.1.2 Transmission braking effect. In vehicles having more than one forward transmission gear ratio, one forward drive position shall provide a greater degree of engine braking than the highest speed transmission ratio at vehicle speeds below 40 kilometers per hour (25 miles per hour).
S3.1.3 Starter interlock. Except as provided in S3.1.3.1 through S3.1.3.3, the engine starter shall be inoperative when the transmission shift position is in a forward or reverse drive position.
S3.1.3.1 After the driver has activated the vehicle's propulsion system:
(a) The engine may stop and restart automatically when the transmission shift position is in any forward drive gear;
(b) The engine may not automatically stop when the transmission is in reverse gear; and
(c) The engine may automatically restart in reverse gear only if the vehicle satisfies (1) and (2):
(1) When the engine is automatically stopped in a forward drive shift position and the driver selects Reverse, the engine restarts immediately whenever the service brake is applied.
(2) When the engine is automatically stopped in a forward drive shift position and the driver selects Reverse, the engine does not start automatically if the service brake is not applied.
S3.1.3.2 Notwithstanding S3.1.3.1, the engine may stop and start at any time after the driver has activated the vehicle's propulsion system if the vehicle can meet the requirements specified in paragraphs (a) and (b):
(a) For passenger cars, multi-purpose passenger vehicles, trucks and buses with a GVWR less than or equal to 4,536 kg (10,000 pounds), the vehicle's propulsion system can propel the vehicle in the normal travel mode in all forward and reverse drive gears without the engine operating. For passenger cars, multipurpose passenger vehicles, trucks and buses with a GVWR greater than 4,536 kg (10,000 pounds), the vehicle's propulsion system can propel the vehicle in the normal travel mode in Reverse and at least one forward drive gear without the engine operating.
(b) If the engine automatically starts while the vehicle is traveling at a steady speed and steady accelerator control setting, the engine does not cause the vehicle to accelerate.
S3.1.3.3 If the transmission shift position is in Park, automatically stopping or restarting the engine shall not take the transmission out of Park.
S3.1.4 Identification of shift positions and of shift position sequence.
S3.1.4.1 Except as specified in S3.1.4.3, if the transmission shift position sequence includes a park position, identification of shift positions, including the positions in relation to each other and the position selected, shall be displayed in view of the driver whenever any of the following conditions exist:
(a) The ignition is in a position where the transmission can be shifted; or
(b) The transmission is not in park.
S3.1.4.2 Except as specified in S3.1.4.3, if the transmission shift position sequence does not include a park position, identification of shift positions, including the positions in relation to each other and the position selected, shall be displayed in view of the driver whenever the ignition is in a position in which the engine is capable of operation.
S3.1.4.3 Such information need not be displayed when the ignition is in a position that is used only to start the vehicle.
S3.1.4.4 All of the information required to be displayed by S3.1.4.1 or S3.1.4.2 shall be displayed in view of the driver in a single location. At the option of the manufacturer, redundant displays providing some or all of the information may be provided.
S3.2 Manual transmissions. Identification of the shift lever pattern of manual transmissions, except three forward speed manual transmissions having the standard “H” pattern, shall be displayed in view of the driver at all times when a driver is present in the driver's seating position.
[70 FR 38051, July 1, 2005, as amended at 70 FR 75965, Dec. 22, 2005]
§ 571.103 Standard No. 103; Windshield defrosting and defogging systems.
top S1. Scope. This standard specifies requirements for windshield defrosting and defogging systems.
S2. Application. This standard applies to passenger cars, multipurpose passenger vehicles, trucks, and buses.
S3. Definitions. Road load means the power output required to move a given motor vehicle at curb weight plus 180 kilograms on level, clean, dry, smooth portland cement concrete pavement (or other surface with equivalent coefficient of surface friction) at a specified speed through still air at 20 degrees Celsius, and standard barometric pressure (101.3 kilopascals) and includes driveline friction, rolling friction, and air resistance.
S4. Requirements. (a) Except as provided in paragraph (b) of this section, each passenger car shall meet the requirements specified in S4.1, S4.2, and S4.3, and each multipurpose passenger vehicle, truck, and bus shall meet the requirements specified in §4.1.
(b) Each passenger car, multipurpose passenger vehicle, truck, and bus manufactured for sale in the noncontinental United States may, at the option of the manufacturer, have a windshield defogging system which operates either by applying heat to the windshield or by dehumidifying the air inside the passenger compartment of the vehicle, in lieu of meeting the requirements specified by paragraph (a) of this section.
S4.1 Each vehicle shall have a windshield defrosting and defogging system.
S4.2 Each passenger car windshield defrosting and defogging system shall meet the requirements of section 3 of SAE Recommended Practice J902, “Passenger Car Windshield Defrosting Systems,” August 1964, when tested in accordance with S4.3, except that “the critical area” specified in paragraph 3.1 of SAE Recommended Practice J902 shall be that established as Area C in accordance with Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 104, “Windshield Wiping and Washing Systems,” and “the entire windshield” specified in paragraph 3.3 of SAE Recommended Practice J902 shall be that established as Area A in accordance with §571.104.
S4.3 Demonstration procedure. The passenger car windshield defrosting and defogging system shall be tested in accordance with the portions of paragraphs 4.1 through 4.4.7 of SAE Recommended Practice J902, August 1964, or SAE Recommended Practice J902a, March 1967, applicable to that system, except that—
(a) During the first 5 minutes of the test:
(1) For a passenger car equipped with a heating system other than a heat exchanger type that uses the engine's coolant as a means to supply the heat to the heat exchanger, the warm-up procedure is that specified by the vehicle's manufacturer for cold weather starting, except that connection to a power or heat source external to the vehicle is not permitted.
(2) For all other passenger cars, the warm-up procedure may be that recommended by the vehicle's manufacturer for cold weather starting.
(b) During the last 35 minutes of the test period (or the entire test period if the 5-minute warm-up procedure specified in paragraph (a) of this section is not used),
(1) For a passenger car equipped with a heating system other than a heat exchanger type that uses the engine's coolant as a means to supply the heat to the heat exchanger, the procedure shall be that specified by the vehicle's manufacturer for cold weather starting, except that connection to a power or heat source external to the vehicle is not permitted.
(2) For all other passenger cars, either—
(i) The engine speed shall not exceed 1,500 r.p.m. in neutral gear; or
(ii) The engine speed and load shall not exceed the speed and load at 40 kilometers per hour in the manufacturer's recommended gear with road load;
(c) A room air change of 90 times per hour is not required;
(d) The windshield wipers may be used during the test if they are operated without manual assist;
(e) One or two windows may be open a total of 25 millimeters;
(f) The defroster blower may be turned on at any time; and
(g) The wind velocity is at any level from 0 to 3 kilometers per hour.
(h) The test chamber temperature and the wind velocity shall be measured, after the engine has been started, at the forwardmost point of the vehicle or a point 914 millimeters from the base of the windshield, whichever is farther forward, at a level halfway between the top and bottom of the windshield on the vehicle centerline.
[36 FR 22902, Dec. 2, 1971, as amended at 40 FR 12992, Mar. 24, 1975; 40 FR 32336, Aug. 1, 1975; 50 FR 48775, Nov. 27, 1985; 59 FR 11006, Mar. 9, 1994; 60 FR 13642, Mar. 14, 1995]
§ 571.104 Standard No. 104; Windshield wiping and washing systems.
top S1. Scope. This standard specifies requirements for windshield wiping and washing systems.
S2. Application. This standard applies to passenger cars, multipurpose passenger vehicles, trucks, and buses.
S3. Definitions. The term seating reference point is substituted for the terms manikin H point, manikin H point with seat in rearmost position and H point wherever any of these terms appear in any SAE Standard or SAE Recommended Practice referred to in this standard.
Daylight opening means the maximum unobstructed opening through the glazing surface, as defined in paragraph 2.3.12 of section E, Ground Vehicle Practice, SAE Aerospace-Automotive Drawing Standards, September 1963.
Glazing surface reference line means the line resulting from the intersection of the glazing surface and a horizontal plane 635 millimeters above the seating reference point, as shown in Figure 1 of SAE Recommended Practice J903a, “Passenger Car Windshield Wiper Systems,” May 1966.
Overall width means the maximum overall body width dimension “W116”, as defined in section E, Ground Vehicle Practice, SAE Aerospace-Automotive Drawing Standards, September 1963.
Plan view reference line means—
(a) For vehicles with bench-type seats, a line parallel to the vehicle longitudinal centerline outboard of the steering wheel centerline 0.15 times the difference between one-half of the shoulder room dimension and the steering wheel centerline-to-car-centerline dimension as shown in Figure 2 of SAE Recommended Practice J903a, May 1966; or
(b) For vehicles with individual-type seats, either—
(i) A line parallel to the vehicle longitudinal centerline which passes through the center of the driver's designated seating position; or
(ii) A line parallel to the vehicle longitudinal centerline located so that the geometric center of the 95 percent eye range contour is positioned on the longitudinal centerline of the driver's designated seating position.
Shoulder room dimension means the front shoulder room dimension “W3” as defined in section E, Ground Vehicle Practice, SAE Aerospace-Automotive Drawing Standards, September 1963.
95 percent eye range contour means the 95th percentile tangential cutoff specified in SAE Recommended Practice J941, “Passenger Car Driver's Eye Range,” November 1965.
S4. Requirements.
S4.1 Windshield wiping system. Each vehicle shall have a power-driven windshield wiping system that meets the requirements of S4.1.1.
S4.1.1 Frequency.
S4.1.1.1 Each windshield wiping system shall have at least two frequencies or speeds.
S4.1.1.2 One frequency or speed shall be at least 45 cycles per minute regardless of engine load and engine speed.
S4.1.1.3 Regardless of engine speed and engine load, the highest and one lower frequency or speed shall differ by at least 15 cycles per minute. Such lower frequency or speed shall be at least 20 cycles per minute regardless of engine speed and engine load.
S4.1.1.4 Compliance with subparagraphs S4.1.1.2 and S4.1.1.3 may be demonstrated by testing under the conditions specified in sections 4.1.1 and 4.1.2 of SAE Recommended Practice J903a, May 1966.
S4.1.2 Wiped area. When tested wet in accordance with SAE Recommended Practice J903a, May 1966, each passenger car windshield wiping system shall wipe the percentage of Areas A, B, and C of the windshield (established in accordance with S4.1.2.1) that (1) is specified in column 2 of the applicable table following subparagraph S4.1.2.1 and (2) is within the area bounded by a perimeter line on the glazing surface 25 millimeters from the edge of the daylight opening.
S4.1.2.1 Areas A, B, and C shall be established as shown in Figures 1 and 2 of SAE Recommended Practice J903a, May 1966, using the angles specified in Columns 3 through 6 of Table I, II, III, or IV, as applicable.
Table I—Passenger Cars of Less Than 1520 Millimeters in Overall Width
| Column 1—Area | Column 2—Minimum percent to be wiped | Angles in degrees |
|---|
| Column 3—Left | Column 4—Right | Column 5—Up | Column 6—Down |
|---|
| A | 80 | 16 | 49 | 7 | 5 |
| B | 94 | 13 | 46 | 4 | 3 |
| C | 99 | 7 | 15 | 3 | 1 |
Table II—Passenger Cars of 1520 or More But Less Than 1630 Millimeters in Overall Width
| Column 1—Area | Column 2—Minimum percent to be wiped | Angles in degrees |
|---|
| Column 3—Left | Column 4—Right | Column 5—Up | Column 6—Down |
|---|
| A | 80 | 17 | 51 | 8 | 5 |
| B | 94 | 13 | 49 | 4 | 3 |
| C | 99 | 7 | 15 | 3 | 1 |
Table III—Passenger Cars of 1630 or More But Less Than 1730 Millimeters in Overall Width
| Column 1—Area | Column 2—Minimum percent to be wiped | Angles in degrees |
|---|
| Column 3—Left | Column 4—Right | Column 5—Up | Column 6—Down |
|---|
| A | 80 | 17 | 53 | 9 | 5 |
| B | 94 | 14 | 51 | 5 | 3 |
| C | 99 | 8 | 15 | 4 | 1 |
Table IV—Passenger Cars of 1730 or More Millimeters in Overall Width
| Column 1—Area | Column 2—Minimum percent to be wiped | Angles in degrees |
|---|
| Column 3—Left | Column 4—Right | Column 5—Up | Column 6—Down |
|---|
| A | 80 | 18 | 56 | 10 | 5 |
| B | 94 | 14 | 53 | 5 | 3 |
| C | 99 | 10 | 15 | 5 | 1 |
S4.2 Windshield washing system.
S4.2.1 Each passenger car shall have a windshield washing system that meets the requirements of SAE Recommended Practice J942, “Passenger Car Windshield Washer Systems,” November 1965, except that the reference to “the effective wipe pattern defined in SAE J903, paragraph 3.1.2” in paragraph 3.1 of SAE Recommended Practice J942 shall be deleted and “the areas established in accordance with subparagraph S4.1.2.1 of Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 104” shall be inserted in lieu thereof.
S4.2.2 Each multipurpose passenger vehicle truck, and bus shall have a windshield washing system that meets the requirements of SAE Recommended Practice J942, November 1965, except that the reference to “the effective wipe pattern defined in SAE J903, paragraph 3.1.2” in paragraph 3.1 of SAE Recommended Practice J942 shall be deleted and “the pattern designed by the manufacturer for the windshield wiping system on the exterior surface of the windshield glazing” shall be inserted in lieu thereof.
[36 FR 22902, Dec. 2, 1971, as amended at 58 FR 13023, Mar. 9, 1993; 60 FR 13643, Mar. 14, 1995; 63 FR 51000, Sept. 24, 1998]
§ 571.105 Standard No. 105; Hydraulic and electric brake systems.
top S1. Scope. This standard specifies requirements for hydraulic and electric service brake systems, and associated parking brake systems.
S2. Purpose. The purpose of this standard is to insure safe braking performance under normal and emergency conditions.
S3. Application. This standard applies to multi-purpose passenger vehicles, trucks, and buses with a GVWR greater than 3,500 kilograms (7,716 pounds) that are equipped with hydraulic or electric brake systems.
S4. Definitions.
Antilock brake system or ABS means a portion of a service brake system that automatically controls the degree of rotational wheel slip during braking by:
(1) Sensing the rate of angular rotation of the wheels;
(2) Transmitting signals regarding the rate of wheel angular rotation to one or more controlling devices which interpret those signals and generate responsive controlling output signals; and
(3) Transmitting those controlling signals to one or more modulators which adjust brake actuating forces in response to those signals.
Backup system means a portion of a service brake system, such as a pump, that automatically supplies energy, in the event of a primary brake power source failure.
Brake power assist unit means a device installed in a hydraulic brake system that reduces the operator effort required to actuate the system, and that if inoperative does not prevent the operator from braking the vehicle by a continued application of muscular force on the service brake control.
Brake power unit means a device installed in a brake system that provides the energy required to actuate the brakes, either directly or indirectly through an auxiliary device, with the operator action consisting only of modulating the energy application level.
Directly Controlled Wheel means a wheel for which the degree of rotational wheel slip is sensed, either at that wheel or on the axle shaft for that wheel and corresponding signals are transmitted to one or more modulators that adjust the brake actuating forces at that wheel. Each modulator may also adjust the brake actuating forces at other wheels that are on the same axle or in the same axle set in response to the same signal or signals.
Electric vehicle or EV means a motor vehicle that is powered by an electric motor drawing current from rechargeable storage batteries, fuel cells, or other portable sources of electrical current, and which may include a non-electrical source of power designed to charge batteries and components thereof.
Electrically-actuated service brakes means service brakes that utilize electrical energy to actuate the foundation brakes.
Full brake application means a brake application in which the force on the brake pedal reaches 150 pounds within 0.3 seconds from the point of application of force to the brake control.
Hydraulic brake system means a system that uses hydraulic fluid as a medium for transmitting force from a service brake control to the service brake, and that may incorporate a brake power assist unit, or a brake power unit.
Indirectly Controlled Wheel means a wheel at which the degree of rotational wheel slip is not sensed, but at which the modulator of an antilock braking system adjusts its brake actuating forces in response to signals from one or more sensed wheels.
Initial brake temperature means the average temperature of the service brakes on the hottest axle of the vehicle 0.2 mi before any brake application.
Lightly loaded vehicle weight means:
(a) For vehicles with a GVWR of 10,000 lbs. or less, unloaded vehicle weight plus 400 lbs. (including driver and instrumentation);
(b) For vehicles with a GVWR greater than 10,000 lbs., unloaded vehicle weight plus 500 lbs. (including driver and instrumentation).
Maximum drive-through speed means the highest possible constant speed at which the vehicle can be driven through 200 feet of a 500-foot radius curve arc without leaving the 12-foot lane.
Parking mechanism means a component or subsystem of the drive train that locks the drive train when the transmission control is placed in a parking or other gear position and the ignition key is removed.
Peak friction coefficient or PFC means the ratio of the maximum value of braking test wheel longitudinal force to the simultaneous vertical force occurring prior to wheel lockup, as the braking torque is progressively increased.
Pressure component means a brake system component that contains the brake system fluid and controls or senses the fluid pressure.
Regenerative braking system or RBS means an electrical energy system that is installed in an EV for recovering or dissipating kinetic energy, and which uses the propulsion motor(s) as a retarder for partial braking of the EV while returning electrical energy to the propulsion batteries or dissipating electrical energy.
Skid number means the frictional resistance of a pavement measured in accordance with American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) Method E–274–70 (as revised July, 1974) at 40 mph, omitting water delivery as specified in paragraphs 7.1 and 7.2 of that method.
Snub means the braking deceleration of a vehicle from a higher reference speed to a lower reference speed that is greater than zero.
Spike stop means a stop resulting from the application of 200 lbs of force on the service brake control in 0.08 s.
Split service brake system means a brake system consisting of two or more subsystems actuated by a single control, designed so that a single failure in any subsystem (such as a leakage-type failure of a pressure component of a hydraulic subsystem except structural failure of a housing that is common to two or more subsystems, or an electrical failure in an electric subsystem) does not impair the operation of any other subsystem.
Stopping distance means the distance traveled by a vehicle from the point of application of force to the brake control to the point at which the vehicle reaches a full stop.
Tandem axle means a group of two or more axles placed in close arrangement one behind the other with the center lines of adjacent axles not more than 72 inches apart.
Variable proportioning brake system means a system that automatically adjusts the braking force at the axles to compensate for vehicle static axle loading and/or dynamic weight transfer between axles during deceleration.
Wheel lockup means 100 percent wheel slip.
S5. Requirements.
S5.1 Service brake systems. Each vehicle must be equipped with a service brake system acting on all wheels. Wear of the service brake must be compensated for by means of a system of automatic adjustment. Each passenger car and each multipurpose passenger vehicle, truck, and bus with a GVWR of 10,000 pounds or less must be capable of meeting the requirements of S5.1.1 through S5.1.6 under the conditions prescribed in S6, when tested according to the procedures and in the sequence set forth in S7. Each school bus with a GVWR greater than 10,000 pounds must be capable of meeting the requirements of S5.1.1 through S5.1.5, and S5.1.7 under the conditions specified in S6, when tested according to the procedures and in the sequence set forth in S7. Each multipurpose passenger vehicle, truck and bus (other than a school bus) with a GVWR greater than 10,000 pounds must be capable of meeting the requirements of S5.1.1, S5.1.2, S5.1.3, and S5.1.7 under the conditions specified in S6, when tested according to the procedures and in the sequence set forth in S7. Except as noted in S5.1.1.2 and S5.1.1.4, if a vehicle is incapable of attaining a speed specified in S5.1.1, S5.1.2, S5.1.3, or S5.1.6, its service brakes must be capable of stopping the vehicle from the multiple of 5 mph that is 4 to 8 mph less than the speed attainable in 2 miles, within distances that do not exceed the corresponding distances specified in Table II. If a vehicle is incapable of attaining a speed specified in S5.1.4 in the time or distance interval set forth, it must be tested at the highest speed attainable in the time or distance interval specified.
S5.1.1 Stopping distance. (a) The service brakes shall be capable of stopping each vehicle with a GVWR of less than 8,000 pounds, and each school bus with a GVWR between 8,000 pounds and 10,000 pounds in four effectiveness tests within the distances and from the speeds specified in S5.1.1.1, S5.1.1.2, S5.1.1.3, and S5.1.1.4.
(b) The service brakes shall be capable of stopping each vehicle with a GVWR of between 8,000 pounds and 10,000 pounds, other than a school bus, in three effectiveness tests within the distances and from the speeds specified in S5.1.1.1, S5.1.1.2, and S5.1.1.4.
(c) The service brakes shall be capable of stopping each vehicle with a GVWR greater than 10,000 pounds in two effectiveness tests within the distances and from the speeds specified in S5.1.1.2 and S5.1.1.3. Each school bus with a GVWR greater than 10,000 pounds manufactured after January 12, 1996 and before March 1, 1999 and which is equipped with an antilock brake system may comply with paragraph S5.1.1.2 and S5.5.1 rather than the first effectiveness test, as specified in S5.1.1.1. Each school bus with a GVWR greater than 10,000 pounds manufactured on or after March 1, 1999 shall be capable of meeting the requirements of S5.1.1 through S5.1.5, under the conditions prescribed in S6, when tested according to the procedures and in the sequence set forth in S7.
S5.1.1.1 In the first (preburnished) effectiveness test, the vehicle shall be capable of stopping from 30 mph and 60 mph within the corresponding distances specified in column I of table II.
S5.1.1.2 In the second effectiveness test, each vehicle with a GVWR of 10,000 pounds or less and each school bus with a GVWR greater than 10,000 pounds shall be capable of stopping from 30 mph and 60 mph, and each vehicle with a GVWR greater than 10,000 pounds (other than a school bus) shall be capable of stopping from 60 mph, within the corresponding distances specified in Column II of Table II. If the speed attainable in 2 miles is not less than 84 mph, a passenger car or other vehicle with a GVWR of 10,000 pounds or less shall also be capable of stopping from 80 mph within the corresponding distances specified in Column II of Table II.
S5.1.1.3 In the third effectiveness test the vehicle shall be capable of stopping at lightly loaded vehicle weight from 60 mph within the corresponding distance specified in column III of table II.
S5.1.1.4 In the fourth effectiveness test, a vehicle with a GVWR of 10,000 pounds or less shall be capable of stopping from 30 and 60 mph within the corresponding distances specified in column I of table II. If the speed attainable in 2 miles is not less than 84 mph, a passenger car, or other vehicle with a GVWR of 10,000 lbs., or less, shall also be capable of stopping from 80 mph within the corresponding distance specified in column I of table II.
If the speed attainable in 2 miles is not less than 99 mph, a passenger car shall, in addition, be capable of stopping from the applicable speed indicated below, within the corresponding distance specified in column I of table II.
| Speed attainable in 2 miles (mph) | Required to stop from (mph) |
|---|
| Not less than 99 but less than 104 | 95 |
| 104 or more | 100 |
For an EV, the speed attainable in 2 miles is determined with the propulsion batteries at a state of charge of not less than 95 percent at the beginning of the run.
S5.1.2 Partial failure.
S5.1.2.1 In vehicles manufactured with a split service brake system, in the event of a rupture or leakage type of failure in a single subsystem, other than a structural failure of a housing that is common to two or more subsystems, the remaining portion(s) of the service brake system shall continue to operate and shall be capable of stopping a vehicle from 60 mph within the corresponding distance specified in column IV of table II.
S5.1.2.2 In vehicles not manufactured with a split service brake system, in the event of any one rupture or leakage type of failure in any component of the service brake system the vehicle shall, by operation of the service brake control, be capable of stopping 10 times consecutively from 60 mph within the corresponding distance specified in column IV of table II.
S5.1.2.3 For a vehicle manufactured with a service brake system in which the brake signal is transmitted electrically between the brake pedal and some or all of the foundation brakes, regardless of the means of actuation of the foundation brakes, the vehicle shall be capable of stopping from 60 mph within the corresponding distance specified in Column IV of Table II with any single failure in any circuit that electrically transmits the brake signal, and with all other systems intact.
S5.1.2.4 For an EV manufactured with a service brake system that incorporates RBS, the vehicle shall be capable of stopping from 60 mph within the corresponding distance specified in Column IV of Table II with any single failure in the RBS, and with all other systems intact.
S5.1.3 Inoperative brake power assist unit or brake power unit. A vehicle equipped with one or more brake power assist units shall meet the requirements of either S5.1.3.1, S5.1.3.2, or S5.1.3.4 (chosen at the option of the manufacturer), and a vehicle equipped with one or more brake power units shall meet the requirements of either S5.1.3.1, S5.1.3.3, or S5.1.3.4 (chosen at the option of the manufacturer).
S5.1.3.1 The service brakes on a vehicle equipped with one or more brake power assist units or brake power units, with one such unit inoperative and depleted of all reserve capability, shall be capable of stopping a vehicle from 60 mph within the corresponding distance specified in column IV of table II.
S5.1.3.2 Brake power assist units. The service brakes on a vehicle equipped with one or more brake power assist units, with one such unit inoperative, shall be capable of stopping a vehicle from 60 mph:
(a) In six consecutive stops at an average deceleration for each stop that is not lower than that specified in column I of table III, when the inoperative unit is not initially depleted of all reserve capability; and
(b) In a final stop, at an average deceleration that is not lower than 7 FPSPS for passenger cars (equivalent stopping distance 554 feet) or 6 FPSPS for vehicles other than passenger cars (equivalent stopping distance 646 feet), as applicable, when the inoperative unit is depleted of all reserve capacity.
S5.1.3.3 Brake power units. The service brakes of a vehicle equipped with one or more brake power units with an accumulator-type reserve system, with any one failure in any one unit shall be capable of stopping the vehicle from 60 mph—
(a) In 10 consecutive stops at an average deceleration for each stop that is not lower than that specified in column II of table III, when the unit is not initially depleted of all reserve capability; and
(b) In a final stop, at an average deceleration that is not lower than 7 FPSPS for passenger cars (equivalent stopping distance 554 feet) or 6 FPSPS for vehicles other than passenger cars (equivalent stopping distance 646 feet), as applicable, when the inoperative unit is depleted of all reserve capacity.
S5.1.3.4 Brake power assist and brake power units. The service brakes of a vehicle equipped with one or more brake power assist units or brake power units with a backup system, with one brake power assist unit or brake power unit inoperative and depleted of all reserve capability and with only the backup system operating in the failed subsystem, shall be capable of stopping the vehicle from 60 mph in 15 consecutive stops at an average deceleration for each stop that is not lower than 12 fpsps (equivalent stopping distance 323 feet).
S5.1.3.5 Electric brakes. Each vehicle with electrically-actuated service brakes (brake power unit) shall comply with the requirements of S5.1.3.1 with any single electrical failure in the electrically-actuated service brakes and all other systems intact.
S5.1.4 Fade and recovery. The service brakes shall be capable of stopping each vehicle in two fade and recovery tests as specified below.
S5.1.4.1 The control force used for the baseline check stops or snubs shall be not less than 10 pounds, nor more than 60 pounds, except that the control force for a vehicle with a GVWR of 10,000 pounds or more may be between 10 pounds and 90 pounds.
S5.1.4.2 (a) Each vehicle with GVWR of 10,000 lbs or less shall be capable of making 5 fade stops (10 fade stops on the second test) from 60 mph at a deceleration not lower than 15 fpsps for each stop, followed by 5 fade stops at the maximum deceleration attainable from 5 to 15 fpsps.
(b) Each vehicle with a GVWR greater than 10,000 pounds shall be capable of making 10 fade snubs (20 fade snubs on the second test) from 40 mph to 20 mph at 10 fpsps for each snub.
S5.1.4.3 (a) Each vehicle with a GVWR of 10,000 pounds or less shall be capable of making five recovery stops from 30 mph at 10 fpsps for each stop, with a control force application that falls within the following maximum and minimum limits:
(1) A maximum for the first four recovery stops of 150 pounds, and for the fifth stop, of 20 pounds more than the average control force for the baseline check; and
(2) A minimum of—
(A) The average control force for the baseline check minus 10 pounds, or
(B) The average control force for the baseline check times 0.60,
whichever is lower (but in no case lower than 5 pounds).
(b) Each vehicle with a GVWR of more than 10,000 pounds shall be capable of making five recovery snubs from 40 mph to 20 mph at 10 fpsps for each snub, with a control force application that falls within the following maximum and minimum limits:
(1) A maximum for the first four recovery snubs of 150 pounds, and for the fifth snub, of 20 pounds more than the average control force for the baseline check (but in no case more than 100 pounds); and
(2) A minimum of—
(A) The average control force for the baseline check minus 10 pounds, or
(B) The average control force for the baseline check times 0.60,
whichever is lower (but in no case lower than 5 pounds).
S5.1.5 Water recovery. The service brakes shall be capable of stopping each vehicle in a water recovery test, as specified below.
S5.1.5.1 The control force used for the baseline check stops or snubs shall be not less than 10 pounds, nor more than 60 pounds, except that the control force for a vehicle with a GVWR of 10,000 pounds or more may be between 10 and 90 pounds.
S5.1.5.2(a) After being driven for 2 minutes at a speed of 5 mph in any combination of forward and reverse directions through a trough having a water dept of 6 inches, each vehicle with a GVWR of 10,000 pounds or less shall be capable of making five recovery stops from 30 mph at ten fpsps for each stop with a control force application that falls within the following maximum and minimum limits:
(1) A maximum for the first four recovery stops of 150 pounds, and for the fifth stop, of 45 pounds more than the average control force for the baseline check (but in no case more than 90 pounds, except that the maximum control force for the fifth stop in the case of a vehicle manufactured before September 1, 1976, shall be not more than plus 60 pounds of the average control force for the baseline check (but in no case more than 110 pounds).
(2) A minimum of—
(A) The average control force for the baseline check minus 10 pounds, or
(B) The average control force for the baseline check times 0.60,
whichever is lower (but in no case lower than 5 pounds).
(b) After being driven for 2 minutes at a speed of 5 mph in any combination of forward and reverse directions through a trough having a water depth of 6 inches, each vehicle with a GVWR of more than 10,000 pounds shall be capable of making five recovery stops from 30 mph at 10 fpsps for each stop with a control force application that falls within the following maximum and minimum limits:
(1) A maximum for the first four recovery stops of 150 pounds, and for the fifth stop, of 60 pounds more than the average control force for the baseline check (but in no case more than 110 pounds); and
(2) A minimum of—
(A) The average control force for the baseline check minus 10 pounds, or
(B) The average control force for the baseline check times 0.60,
whichever is lower (but in no case lower than 5 pounds).
S5.1.6 Spike stops. Each vehicle with a GVWR of 10,000 lbs. or less shall be capable of making 10 spike stops from 30 mph, followed by 6 effectiveness (check) stops from 60 mph, at least one of which shall be within a corresponding stopping distance specified in column I of table II.
S5.1.7 Stability and control during braking. When stopped four consecutive times under the conditions specified in S6, each vehicle with a GVWR greater than 10,000 pounds manufactured on or after July 1, 2005 and each vehicle with a GVWR greater than 10,000 pounds manufactured in two or more stages on or after July 1, 2006 shall stop from 30 mph or 75 percent of the maximum drive-through speed, whichever is less, at least three times within the 12-foot lane, without any part of the vehicle leaving the roadway. Stop the vehicle with the vehicle at its lightly loaded vehicle weight, or at the manufacturer's option, at its lightly loaded vehicle weight plus not more than an additional 1000 pounds for a roll bar structure on the vehicle.
S5.2 Parking Brake System. Each vehicle shall be manufactured with a parking brake system of a friction type with a solely mechanical means to retain engagement, which shall under the conditions of S6, when tested according to the procedures specified in S7, meet the requirements specified in S5.2.1, S5.2.2, or S5.2.3 as appropriate, with the system engaged—
(a) In the case of a vehicle with a GVWR of 4,536 kilograms (10,000 pounds) or less, with a force applied to the control not to exceed 125 pounds for a foot-operated system and 90 pounds for a hand-operated system; and
(b) In the case of a vehicle with a GVWR greater than 4,536 kilograms (10,000 pounds), with a force applied to the control not to exceed 150 pounds for a foot-operated system and 125 pounds for a hand-operated system.
S5.2.1. Except as provided in §5.2.2, the parking brake system on a passenger car and on a school bus with a GVWR of 10,000 pounds or less shall be capable of holding the vehicle stationary (to the limit of traction on the braked wheels) for 5 minutes in both a forward and reverse direction on a 30 percent grade.
S5.2.2 A vehicle of a type described in S5.2.1 at the option of the manufacturer may meet the requirements of S5.2.2.1, S5.2.2.2, and S5.2.2.3 instead of the requirements of S5.2.1 if:
(a) The vehicle has a transmission or transmission control which incorporates a parking mechanism, and
(b) The parking mechanism must be engaged before the ignition key can be removed.
S5.2.2.1 The vehicle's parking brake and parking mechanism, when both are engaged, shall be capable of holding the vehicle stationary (to the limit of traction of the braked wheels) for 5 minutes, in both forward and reverse directions, on a 30 percent grade.
S5.2.2.2 The vehicle's parking brake, with the parking mechanism not engaged, shall be capable of holding the vehicle stationary for 5 minutes, in both forward and reverse directions, on a 20 percent grade.
S5.2.2.3 With the parking mechanism engaged and the parking brake not engaged, the parking mechanism shall not disengage or fracture in a manner permitting vehicle movement, when the vehicle is impacted at each end, on a level surface, by a barrier moving at 21/2mph.
S5.2.3 (a) The parking brake system on a multipurpose passenger vehicle, truck or bus (other than a school bus) with a GVWR of 4,536 kilograms (10,000 pounds) or less shall be capable of holding the vehicle stationary for 5 minutes, in both forward and reverse directions, on a 20 percent grade.
(b) The parking brake system on a multipurpose passenger vehicle, truck, or bus (including a school bus) with a GVWR greater than 4,536 kilograms (10,000 pounds) shall be capable of holding the vehicle stationary for 5 minutes, in both forward and reverse directions, on a 20 percent grade.
S5.3 Brake system indicator lamp. Each vehicle shall have a brake system indicator lamp or lamps, mounted in front of and in clear view of the driver, which meet the requirements of S5.3.1 through S5.3.5. A vehicle with a GVWR of 10,000 pounds or less may have a single common indicator lamp. A vehicle with a GVWR of greater than 10,000 pounds may have an indicator lamp which is common for gross loss of pressure, drop in the level of brake fluid, or application of the parking brake, but shall have a separate indicator lamp for antilock brake system malfunction. However, the options provided in S5.3.1(a) shall not apply to a vehicle manufactured without a split service brake system; such a vehicle shall, to meet the requirements of S5.3.1(a), be equipped with a malfunction indicator that activates under the conditions specified in S5.3.1(a)(4). This warning indicator shall, instead of meeting the requirements of S5.3.2 through S5.3.5, activate (while the vehicle remains capable of meeting the requirements of S5.1.2.2 and the ignition switch is in the “on” position) a continuous or intermittent audible signal and a flashing warning light, displaying the words “STOP-BRAKE FAILURE” in block capital letters not less than one-quarter of an inch in height.
S5.3.1 An indicator lamp shall be activated when the ignition (start) switch is in the “on” (“run”) position and whenever any of the conditions (a) or (b), (c), (d), (e), (f), and (g) occur:
(a) A gross loss of pressure (such as caused by rupture of a brake line but not by a structural failure of a housing that is common to two or more subsystems) due to one of the following conditions (chosen at the option of the manufacturer):
(1) Before or upon application of a differential pressure of not more than 225 lb/in2 between the active and failed brake system measured at a master cylinder outlet or a slave cylinder outlet.
(2) Before or upon application of 50 pounds of control force upon a fully manual service brake.
(3) Before or upon application of 25 pounds of control force upon a service brake with a brake power assist unit.
(4) When the supply pressure in a brake power unit drops to a level not less than one-half of the normal system pressure.
(b) A drop in the level of brake fluid in any master cylinder reservoir compartment to less than the recommended safe level specified by the manufacturer or to one-fourth of the fluid capacity of that reservoir compartment, whichever is greater.
(c) A malfunction that affects the generation or transmission of response or control signals in an antilock brake system, or a total functional electrical failure in a variable proportioning brake system.
(d) Application of the parking brake.
(e) For a vehicle with electrically-actuated service brakes, failure of the source of electric power to the brakes, or diminution of state of charge of the batteries to less than a level specified by the manufacturer for the purpose of warning a driver of degraded brake performance.
(f) For a vehicle with electric transmission of the service brake control signal, failure of a brake control circuit.
(g) For an EV with RBS that is part of the service brake system, failure of the RBS.
S5.3.2 (a) Except as provided in paragraph (b) of this section, all indicator lamps shall be activated as a check of lamp function either when the ignition (start) switch is turned to the “on” (run) position when the engine is not running, or when the ignition (start) switch is in a position between “on” (run) and “start” that is designated by the manufacturer as a check position.
(b) The indicator lamps need not be activated when a starter interlock is in operation.
S5.3.3 (a) Each indicator lamp activated due to a condition specified in S5.3.1 shall remain activated as long as the malfunction exists, whenever the ignition (start) switch is in the “on” (run) position, whether or not the engine is running.
(b) For vehicles manufactured on and after September 1, 1999 with GVWRs greater than 10,000 lbs, each message about the existence of a malfunction, as described in S5.3.1(c), shall be stored in the antilock brake system after the ignition switch is turned to the “off” position and the indicator lamp shall be automatically reactivated when the ignition switch is again turned to the “on” position. The indicator lamp shall also be activated as a check of lamp function whenever the ignition is turned to the “on” (run) position. The indicator lamp shall be deactivated at the end of the check of lamp function unless there is a malfunction or a message about a malfunction that existed when the key switch was last turned to the “off” position.
S5.3.4 When an indicator lamp is activated it may be steady burning or flashing.
S5.3.5 (a) Each indicator lamp shall display word, words or abbreviation, in accordance with the requirements of Standard No. 101 (49 CFR 571.101) and/or this section, which shall have letters not less than1/8-inch high and be legible to the driver in daylight when lighted. Words in addition to those required by Standard No. 101 and/or this section and symbols may be provided for purposes of clarity.
(b) If a single common indicator is used, the lamp shall display the word “Brake”. The letters and background of a single common indicator shall be of contrasting colors, one of which is red.
(c)(1) If separate indicators are used for one or more of the conditions described in S5.3.1(a) through S5.3.1(g) of this standard, the indicator display shall include the word “Brake” and appropriate additional labeling, except as provided in (c)(1) (A) through (D) of this paragraph.
(A) If a separate indicator lamp is provided for gross loss of pressure, the words “Brake Pressure” shall be used for S5.3.1(a).
(B) If a separate indicator lamp is provided for low brake fluid, the words “Brake Fluid” shall be used for S5.3.1(b), except for vehicles using hydraulic system mineral oil.
(C) If a separate indicator lamp is provided for an anti-lock system, the single word “Antilock” or “Anti-lock”, or the abbreviation “ABS”, may be used for S5.3.1(c).
(D) If a separate indicator lamp is provided for application of the parking brake, the single word “Park” may be used for S5.3.1(d).
(E) If a separate indicator is used for the regenerative brake system, the symbol “RBS” may be used. RBS failure may also be indicated by a lamp displaying the symbol “ABS/RBS.”
(2) Except for a separate indicator lamp for an anti-lock system, a regenerative system, or an indicator for both anti-lock and regenerative system, the letters and background of each separate indicator lamp shall be of contrasting colors, one of which is red. The letters and background of a separate lamp for an anti-lock system, a regenerative system, or a lamp displaying both an anti-lock and a regenerative system shall be of contrasting colors, one of which is yellow.
S5.4 Reservoirs.
S5.4.1 Master cylinder reservoirs. A master cylinder shall have a reservoir compartment for each service brake subsystem serviced by the master cylinder. Loss of fluid from one compartment shall not result in a complete loss of brake fluid from another compartment.
S5.4.2 Reservoir capacity. Reservoirs, whether for master cylinders or other type systems, shall have a total minimum capacity equivalent to the fluid displacement resulting when all the wheel cylinders or caliper pistons serviced by the reservoirs move from a new lining, fully retracted position (as adjusted initially to the manufacturer's recommended setting) to a fully worn, fully applied position, as determined in accordance with S7.18(c) of this standard. Reservoirs shall have completely separate compartments for each subsystem except that in reservoir systems utilizing a portion of the reservoir for a common supply to two or more subsystems, individual partial compartments shall each have a minimum volume of fluid equal to at least the volume displaced by the master cylinder piston servicing the subsystem, during a full stroke of the piston. Each brake power unit reservoir servicing only the brake system shall have a minimum capacity equivalent to the fluid displacement required to charge the system piston(s) or accumulator(s) to normal operating pressure plus the displacement resulting when all the wheel cylinders or caliper pistons serviced by the reservoir or accumulator(s) move from a new lining fully retracted position (as adjusted initially to the manufacturer's recommended setting) to a fully worn, fully applied position.
S5.4.3 Reservoir labeling —Each vehicle equipped with hydraulic brakes shall have a brake fluid warning statement that reads as follows, in letters at least one-eighth of an inch high: “WARNING, Clean filler cap before removing. Use only ___ fluid from a sealed container.” (Inserting the recommended type of brake fluid as specified in 49 CFR 571.116, e.g., “DOT 3”). The lettering shall be—
(a) Permanently affixed, engraved, or embossed;
(b) Located so as to be visible by direct view, either on or within 4 inches of the brake fluid reservoir filler plug or cap; and
(c) Of a color that contrasts with its background, if it is not engraved or embossed.
S5.5 Antilock and variable proportioning brake systems.
S5.5.1 Each vehicle with a GVWR greater than 10,000 pounds, except for any vehicle with a speed attainable in 2 miles of not more than 33 mph, shall be equipped with an antilock brake system that directly controls the wheels of at least one front axle and the wheels of at least one rear axle of the vehicle. On each vehicle with a GVWR greater than 10,000 pounds but not greater than 19,500 pounds and motor homes with a GVWR greater than 10,000 pounds but not greater than 22,500 pounds manufactured before March 1, 2001, the antilock brake system may also directly control the wheels of the rear drive axle by means of a single sensor in the driveline. Wheels on other axles of the vehicle may be indirectly controlled by the antilock brake system.
S5.5.2 In the event of any failure (structural or functional) in an antilock or variable proportioning brake system, the vehicle shall be capable of meeting the stopping distance requirements specified in S5.1.2 for service brake system partial failure. For an EV that is equipped with both ABS and RBS that is part of the service brake system, the ABS must control the RBS.
S5.6 Brake system integrity. Each vehicle shall be capable of completing all performance requirements of S5 without—
(a) Detachment or fracture of any component of the braking system, such as brake springs and brake shoe or disc pad facing, other than minor cracks that do not impair attachment of the friction facing. All mechanical components of the braking system shall be intact and functional. Friction facing tearout (complete detachment of lining) shall not exceed 10 percent of the lining on any single frictional element.
(b) Any visible brake fluid or lubricant on the friction surface of the brake, or leakage at the master cylinder or brake power unit reservoir cover, seal and filler openings.
S6 Test conditions. The performance requirements of S5 shall be met under the following conditions. Where a range of conditions is specified, the vehicle shall be capable of meeting the requirements at all points within the range. Compliance of vehicles manufactured in two or more stages may, at the option of the final-stage manufacturer, be demonstrated to comply with this standard by adherence to the instructions of the incomplete manufacturer provided with the vehicle in accordance with §568.4(a)(7)(ii) and §568.5 of title 49 of the Code of Federal Regulations.
S6.1 Vehicle weight.
S6.1.1 Other than tests specified at lightly loaded vehicle weight in S7.5(a), S7.7, S7.8, and S7.9, the vehicle is loaded to its GVWR such that the weight on each axle as measured at the tire-ground interface is in proportion to its GAWR, except that each fuel tank is filled to any level from 100 percent of capacity (corresponding to full GVWR) to 75 percent. However, if the weight on any axle of a vehicle at lightly loaded vehicle weight exceeds the axle's proportional share of the gross vehicle weight rating, the load required to reach GVWR is placed so that the weight on that axle remains the same as a lightly loaded vehicle weight.
S6.1.2 For applicable tests specified in S7.5(a), S7.7, S7.8, and S7.9, vehicle weight is lightly loaded vehicle weight, with the added weight, except for the roll bar structure allowed for trucks and buses with a GVWR greater than 10,000 pounds, distributed in the front passenger seat area in passenger cars, multipurpose passenger vehicles, and trucks, and in the area adjacent to the driver's seat in buses.
S6.2 Electric vehicles and electric brakes.
S6.2.1 The state of charge of the propulsion batteries is determined in accordance with SAE Recommended Practice J227a, Electric Vehicle Test Procedure, February 1976. The applicable sections of J227a are 3.2.1 through 3.2.4, 3.3.1 through 3.3.2.2, 3.4.1 and 3.4.2, 4.2.1, 5.2, 5.2.1, and 5.3.
S6.2.2 At the beginning of the first effectiveness test specified in S7.3, and at the beginning of each burnishing procedure, each EV's propulsion battery is at the maximum state of charge recommended by the manufacturer, as stated in the vehicle operator's manual or on a label that is permanently attached to the vehicle, or, if the manufacturer has made no recommendation, at a state of charge of not less than 95 percent. If a battery is replaced rather than recharged, the replacement battery is to be charged and measured for state of charge in accordance with these procedures. During each burnish procedure, each propulsion battery is restored to the recommended state of charge or a state of charge of not less than 95 percent after each increment of 40 burnish stops until each burnish procedure is complete. The batteries may be charged at a more frequent interval if, during a particular 40-stop increment, the EV is incapable of achieving the initial burnish test speed. During each burnish procedure, the propulsion batteries may be charged by an external means or replaced by batteries that are charged to the state of charge recommended by the manufacturer or a state of charge of not less than 95 percent. For EVs having a manual control for setting the level of regenerative braking, the manual control, at the beginning of each burnish procedure, is set to provide maximum regenerative braking throughout the burnish.
S6.2.3 At the beginning of each performance test in the test sequence (S7,3, S7.5, S7.7 through S7.11, and S7.13 through S7.19 of this standard), unless otherwise specified, each propulsion battery of an EV is at the maximum state of charge recommended by the manufacturer, as stated in the vehicle operator's manual or on a label that is permanently attached to the vehicle, or, if the manufacturer has made no recommendation, at a state of charge of not less than 95 percent. If batteries are replaced rather than recharged, each replacement battery shall be charged and measured for state of charge in accordance with these procedures. No further charging of any propulsion battery occurs during any of the performance tests in the test sequence of this standard. If the propulsion batteries are depleted during a test sequence such that the vehicle reaches automatic shut-down, will not accelerate, or the low state of charge warning lamp is illuminated, the vehicle is to be accelerated to brake test speed by auxiliary means.
S6.2.4 (a) For an EV equipped with RBS, the RBS is considered to be part of the service brake system if it is automatically controlled by an application of the service brake control, if there is no means provided for the driver to disconnect or otherwise deactivate it, and if it is activated in all transmission positions, including neutral. The RBS is operational during all burnishes and all tests, except for the test of a failed RBS.
(b) For an EV equipped with an RBS that is not part of the service brake system, the RBS is operational and set to produce the maximum regenerative braking effect during the burnishes, and is disabled during the test procedures. If the vehicle is equipped with a neutral gear that automatically disables the RBS, the test procedures which are designated to be conducted in gear may be conducted in neutral.
S6.2.5 For tests conducted “in neutral,” the operator of an EV with no “neutral” position (or other means such as a clutch for disconnecting the drive train from the propulsion motor(s)) does not apply any electromotive force to the propulsion motor(s). Any electromotive force that is applied to the propulsion motor(s) automatically remains in effect unless otherwise specified by the test procedure.
S6.2.6 A vehicle equipped with electrically-actuated service brakes also performs the following test series. Conduct 10 stopping tests from a speed of 100 kph or the maximum vehicle speed, whichever is less. At least two of the 10 stopping distances must be less than or equal to 70 meters. The vehicle is loaded to GVWR for these tests and the transmission is in the neutral position when the service brake control is actuated and throughout the remainder of the test. The battery or batteries providing power to those electrically-actuated brakes, at the beginning of each test, shall be in a depleted state of charge for conditions (a), (b), or (c) of this paragraph as appropriate. An auxiliary means may be used to accelerate an EV to test speed.
(a) For an EV equipped with electrically-actuated service brakes deriving power from the propulsion batteries, and with automatic shut-down capability of the propulsion motor(s), the propulsion batteries are at not more than five percent above the EV actual automatic shut-down critical value. The critical value is determined by measuring the state-of-charge of each propulsion battery at the instant that automatic shut-down occurs and averaging the states-of-charge recorded.
(b) For an EV equipped with electrically-actuated service brakes deriving power from the propulsion batteries, and with no automatic shut-down capability of the propulsion motor(s), the propulsion batteries are at an average of not more than five percent above the actual state of charge at which the brake failure warning signal, required by S5.3.1(e) of this standard, is illuminated.
(c) For a vehicle which has an auxiliary battery (or batteries) that provides electrical energy to operate the electrically-actuated service brakes, the auxiliary battery(batteries) is (are) at (at an average of) not more than five percent above the actual state of charge at which the brake failure warning signal, required by S5.3.1(e) of this standard, is illuminated.
S6.3 Tire inflation pressure. Tire inflation pressure is the pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer for the GVWR of the vehicle.
S6.4 Transmission selector control. For S7.3, S7.5, S7.8, S7.15, S7.17, S7.11.1.2, S7.11.2.2, S7.11.3.2, and as required for S7.13, the transmission selector control is in neutral for all decelerations. For all other tests during all decelerations, the transmission selector is in the control position, other than overdrive, recommended by the manufacturer for driving on a level surface at the applicable test speed. To avoid engine stall during tests required to be run in gear a manual transmission may be shifted to neutral (or the clutch disengaged) when the vehicle speed decreases to 20 mph.
S6.5 Engine. Engine idle speed and ignition timing settings are according to the manufacturer's recommendations. If the vehicle is equipped with an adjustable engine speed governor, it is adjusted according to the manufacturer's recommendation.
S6.6 Vehicle openings. All vehicle openings (doors, windows, hood, trunk, convertible top, cargo doors, etc.) are closed except as required for instrumentation purposes.
S6.7 Ambient temperature. The ambient temperature is any temperature between 32 °F. and 100 °F.
S6.8 Wind velocity. The wind velocity is zero.
S6.9 Road surface.
S6.9.1 For vehicles with a GVWR of 10,000 pounds or less, road tests are conducted on a 12-foot-wide, level roadway, having a skid number of 81. Burnish stops are conducted on any surface. The parking brake test surface is clean, dry, smooth, Portland cement concrete.
S6.9.2(a) For vehicles with a GVWR greater than 10,000 pounds, road tests (excluding stability and control during braking tests) are conducted on a 12-foot-wide, level roadway, having a peak friction coefficient of 0.9 when measured using an American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) E 1136 standard reference test tire, in accordance with ASTM Method E 1337–90, at a speed of 40 mph, without water delivery. Burnish stops are conducted on any surface. The parking brake test surface is clean, dry, smooth, Portland cement concrete.
S6.9.2(b) For vehicles with a GVWR greater than 10,000 pounds, stability and control during braking tests are conducted on a 500-foot-radius curved roadway with a wet level surface having a peak friction coefficient of 0.5 when measured on a straight or curved section of the curved roadway using an American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) E1136 standard reference tire, in accordance with ASTM Method E1337–90, at a speed of 40 mph, with water delivery.
S6.10 Vehicle position and wheel lockup restrictions. The vehicle is aligned in the center of the roadway at the start of each brake application. Stops, other than spike stops, are made without any part of the vehicle leaving the roadway.
S6.10.1 For vehicles with a GVWR of 10,000 pounds or less, stops are made with wheel lockup permitted only as follows:
(a) At vehicle speeds above 10 mph, there may be controlled wheel lockup on an antilock-equipped axle, and lockup of not more than one wheel per vehicle, uncontrolled by an antilock system. (Dual wheels on one side of an axle are considered a single wheel.)
(b) At vehicle speeds of 10 mph or less, any wheel may lock up for any duration.
(c) Unlimited wheel lockup is allowed during spike stops (but not spike check stops), partial failure stops, and inoperative brake power or power assist unit stops.
S6.10.2 For vehicles with a GVWR greater than 10,000 pounds, stops are made with wheel lockup permitted only as follows:
(a) At vehicle speeds above 20 mph, any wheel on a nonsteerable axle other than the two rearmost nonliftable, nonsteerable axles may lock up for any duration. The wheels on the two rearmost nonliftable, nonsteerable axles may lock up according to (b).
(b) At vehicle speeds above 20 mph, one wheel on any axle or two wheels on any tandem may lock up for any duration.
(c) At vehicle speeds above 20 mph, any wheel not permitted to lock in (a) or (b) may lock up repeatedly, with each lockup occurring for a duration of one second or less.
(d) At vehicle speeds of 20 mph or less, any wheel may lock up for any duration.
(e) Unlimited wheel lockup is allowed during partial failure stops, and inoperative brake power or power assist stops.
S6.11 Thermocouples. The brake temperature is measured by plug-type thermocouples installed in the approximate center of the facing length and width of the most heavily loaded shoe or disc pad, one per brake, as shown in figure 1. A second thermocouple may be installed at the beginning of the test sequence if the lining wear is expected to reach a point causing the first thermocouple to contact the metal rubbing surface of a drum or rotor. For centergrooved shoes or pads, thermocouples are installed within one-eighth of an inch to one-quarter inch of the groove and as close to the center as possible.
S6.12 Initial brake temperature. Unless otherwise specified the brake temperature is 150 °F. to 200 °F.
S6.13 Control forces. Unless otherwise specified, the force applied to a brake control is not less than 15 lb and not more than 150 lb.
S6.14 Special drive conditions. A vehicle with a GVWR greater than 10,000 pounds equipped with an interlocking axle system or a front wheel drive system that is engaged and disengaged by the driver is tested with the system disengaged.
S6.15 Selection of compliance options. Where manufacturer options are specified, the manufacturer shall select the option by the time it certifies the vehicle and may not thereafter select a different option for the vehicle. Each manufacturer shall, upon request from the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration, provide information regarding which of the compliance options it has selected for a particular vehicle or make/model.
S7. Test procedure and sequence. Each vehicle shall be capable of meeting all the applicable requirements of S5 when tested according to the procedures and sequence set forth below, without replacing any brake system part or making any adjustments to the brake system other than as permitted in the burnish and reburnish procedures and in S7.9 and S7.10. (For vehicles only having to meet the requirements of S5.1.1, S5.1.2, S5.1.3, and S5.1.7 in section S5.1, the applicable test procedures and sequence are S7.1, S7.2, S7.4, S7.5(b), S7.5(a), S7.8, S7.9, S7.10, and S7.18. However, at the option of the manufacturer, the following test procedure and sequence may be conducted: S7.1, S7.2, S7.3, S7.4, S7.5(b), S7.6, S7.7, S7.5(a), S7.8, S7.9, S7.10, and S7.18. The choice of this option must not be construed as adding to the requirements specified in S5.1.2 and S5.1.3.) Automatic adjusters must remain activated at all times. A vehicle shall be deemed to comply with the stopping distance requirements of S5.1 if at least one of the stops at each speed and load specified in each of S7.3, S7.5(b), S7.8, S7.9, S7.10, S7.15 and S7.17 (check stops) is made within a stopping distance that does not exceed the corresponding distance specified in Table II. When the transmission selector control is required to be in neutral for a deceleration, a stop or snub must be obtained by the following procedures:
(a) Exceed the test speed by 4 to 8 mph;
(b) Close the throttle and coast in gear to approximately 2 mph above the test speed;
(c) Shift to neutral; and
(d) When the test speed is reached, apply the service brakes.
S7.1 Brake warming. If the initial brake temperature for the first stop in a test procedure (other than S7.7 and S7.16) has not been reached, heat the brakes to the initial brake temperature by making not more than 10 snubs from not more than 40 to 10 mph, at a deceleration not greater than 10 fpsps.
S7.2 Pretest instrumentation check. Conduct a general check of instrumentation by making not more than 10 stops from a speed of not more than 30 mph, or 10 snubs from a speed of not more than 40 to 10 mph, at a deceleration of not more than 10 fpsps. If instrument repair, replacement, or adjustment is necessary, make not more than 10 additional stops or snubs after such repair, replacement, or adjustment.
S7.3 Service brake system—first ( preburnish ) effectiveness test. Make six stops from 30 mph. Then make six stops from 60 mph.
S7.4 Service brake system—burnish procedure.
S7.4.1 Vehicles with GVWR of 10,000 lb or less.
S7.4.1.1 Burnish. Burnish the brakes by making 200 stops from 40 mph at 12 fpsps (the 150 lb control force limit does not apply here). The interval from the start of one service brake application to the start of the next shall be either the time necessary to reduce the initial brake temperature to between 230 °F. and 270 °F., or the distance of 1 mile, whichever occurs first. Accelerate to 40 mph after each stop and maintain that speed until making the next stop.
S7.4.1.2 Brake adjustment—post burnish. After burnishing, adjust the brakes in accordance with the manufacturer's published recommendations.
S7.4.2 Vehicles with GVWR greater than 10,000 pounds.
S7.4.2.1 Burnish. Vehicles are burnished according to the following procedures. Make 500 snubs between 40 mph and 20 mph at a deceleration rate of 10 f.p.s.p.s. Except where an adjustment is specified, after each brake application accelerate to 40 mph and maintain that speed until making the next brake application at a point 1 mile from the initial point of the previous brake application. If the vehicle cannot attain a speed of 40 mph in 1 mph, continue to accelerate until the vehicle reaches 40 mph or until the vehicle has traveled 1.5 miles from the initial point of the previous brake application, whichever occurs first. The brakes shall be adjusted three times during the burnish procedure, in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations, after 125, 250, and 375 snubs.
S7.4.2.2 Brake adjustment—post burnish. After burnishing, adjust the brakes in accordance with the manufacturer's published recommendations.
S7.5 (a) Stability and control during braking (vehicles with a GVWR greater than 10,000 pounds). Make four stops in the lightly-loaded weight condition specified in S5.1.7. Use a full brake application for the duration of the stop, with the clutch pedal depressed or the transmission selector control in the neutral position, for the duration of each stop.
(b) Service brake system—second effectiveness test. For vehicles with a GVWR of 10,000 pounds or less, or any school bus, make six stops from 30 mph. Then, for any vehicle, make six stops from 60 mph. Then, for a vehicle with a GVWR of 10,000 pounds or less, make four stops from 80 mph if the speed attainable in 2 miles is not less than 84 mph.
S7.6 First reburnish. Repeat S7.4, except make 35 burnish stops or snubs. In the case of vehicles burnished in accordance with S7.4.2.1(a) of this section, reburnish the vehicle by making 35 snubs from 60 to 20 mph, but if the hottest brake temperature reaches 500 °F ±50 °F, make the remainder of the brake applications from the highest snub condition listed in Table IV that will maintain the hottest brake temperature at 500 °F ±50 °F. If at a snub condition of 40 to 20 mph, the temperature of the hottest brake exceeds 550 °F, make the remainder of the 35 brake applications from the snub condition without regard to brake temperature.
S7.7 Parking brake test. The parking brake tests for any vehicle on different grades, in different directions, and for different loads may be conducted in any order. The force required for actuation of a hand-operated brake system shall be measured at the center of the hand grip area or at a distance of 11/2inches from the end of the actuation lever, as illustrated in Figure II.
S7.7.1 Test procedure for requirements of S5.2.1 and S5.2.3.
S7.7.1.1 Condition the parking brake friction elements so that the temperature at the beginning of the test is at any level not more than 150 °F. (when the temperature of components on both ends of an axle are averaged).
S7.7.1.2 Drive the vehicle, loaded to GVWR, onto the specified grade with the longitudinal axis of the vehicle in the direction of the slope of the grade, stop the vehicle and hold it stationary by application of the service brake control, and place the transmission in neutral.
S7.7.1.3 With the vehicle held stationary by means of the service brake control, apply the parking brake by a single application of the force specified in (a), (b), or (c) of this paragraph, except that a series of applications to achieve the specified force may be made in the case of a parking brake system design that does not allow the application of the specified force in a single application:
(a) In the case of a passenger car or other vehicle with a GVWR of 10,000 lbs. or less, not more than 125 pounds for a foot-operated system, and not more than 90 pounds for a hand-operated system; and
(b) In the case of a vehicle with a GVWR greater than 4,536 kilograms (10,000 pounds) not more than 150 pounds for a foot-operated system, and not more than 125 pounds for a hand-operated system.
(c) For a vehicle using an electrically-activated parking brake, apply the parking brake by activating the parking brake control.
S7.7.1.4 Following the application of the parking brake in accordance with S7.7.1.3, release all force on the service brake control and commence the measurement of time if the vehicle remains stationary. If the vehicle does not remain stationary, reapplication of the service brake to hold the vehicle stationary, with reapplication of a force to the parking brake control at the level specified in S7.7.1.3 (a) or (b) as appropriate for the vehicle being tested (without release of the ratcheting or other holding mechanism of the parking brake) may be used twice to attain a stationary position.
S7.7.1.5 Following observation of the vehicle in a stationary condition for the specified time in one direction, repeat the same test procedure with the vehicle orientation in the opposite direction on the specified grade.
S7.7.1.6 Check the operation of the parking brake application indicator required by S5.3.1(d).
S7.7.2 Test procedure for requirements of S5.2.2 (a) Check that transmission must be placed in park position to release key;
(b) Test as in S7.7.1, except in addition place the transmission control to engage the parking mechanism; and
(c) Test as in S7.7.1 except on a 20 percent grade, with the parking mechanism not engaged.
S7.7.3 Lightly loaded vehicle. Repeat S7.7.1 or S7.7.2 as applicable except with the vehicle at lightly loaded vehicles weight or at manufacturer's option, for a vehicle with GVWR greater than 10,000 pounds, at lightly loaded vehicle weight plus not more than an additional 1,000 pounds for a roll bar structure on the vehicle.
S7.7.4 Non-service brake type parking brake systems. For vehicles with parking brake systems not utilizing the service brake friction elements, burnish the friction elements of such systems prior to parking brake tests according to the manufacturer's published recommendations as furnished to the purchaser. If no recommendations are furnished, run the vehicle in an unburnished condition.
S7.8 Service brake system test—lightly loaded vehicle (third effectiveness) test. Make six stops from 60 mph with vehicle at lightly vehicle weight, or at the manufacturer's option for a vehicle with GVWR greater than 10,000 pounds, at lightly loaded vehicle weight plus not more than an additional 1,000 pounds for a roll bar structure on the vehicle. (This test is not applicable to a vehicle which has a GVWR of not less than 7,716 pounds and not greater than 10,000 pounds and is not a school bus.)
S7.9 Service brake system test—partial failure.
S7.9.1 With the vehicle at lightly loaded vehicle weight or at the manufacturer's option for a vehicle with a GVWR greater than 10,000 pounds, at lightly loaded vehicle weight plus not more than an additional 1,000 pounds for a roll bar structure on the vehicle, alter the service brake system to produce any one rupture or leakage type of failure, other than a structural failure of a housing that is common to two or more subsystems. Determine the control force, pressure level, or fluid level (as appropriate for the indicator being tested) necessary to activate the brake system indicator lamp. Make four stops if the vehicle is equipped with a split service brake system, or 10 stops if the vehicle is not so equipped, each from 60 mph, by a continuous application of the service brake control. Restore the service brake system to normal at completion of this test.
S7.9.2 Repeat S7.9.1 for each of the other subsystems.
S7.9.3 Repeat S7.9.1 and S7.9.2 with vehicle at GVWR. Restore the service brake system to normal at completion of this test.
S7.9.4 (For vehicles with antilock and/or variable proportioning brake systems.) With vehicle at GVWR, disconnect functional power source, or otherwise render antilock system inoperative. Disconnect variable proportioning brake system. Make four stops, each from 60 mph. If more than one antilock or variable proportioning brake subsystem is provided, disconnect or render one subsystem inoperative and run as above. Restore system to normal at completion of this test. Repeat for each subsystem provided.
Determine whether the brake system indicator lamp is activated when the electrical power source to the antilock or variable proportioning unit is disconnected.
S7.9.5 For a vehicle in which the brake signal is transmitted electrically between the brake pedal and some or all of the foundation brakes, regardless of the means of actuation of the foundation brakes, the tests in S7.9.1 through S7.9.3 of this standard are conducted by inducing any single failure in any circuit that electrically transmits the brake signal, and all other systems intact. Determine whether the brake system indicator lamp is activated when the failure is induced.
S7.9.6 For an EV with RBS that is part of the service brake system, the tests specified in S7.9.1 through S7.9.3 are conducted with the RBS disconnected and all other systems intact. Determine whether the brake system indicator lamp is activated when the RBS is disconnected.
S7.10 Service brake system—inoperative brake power unit or brake power assist unit test. (For vehicles equipped with brake power unit or brake power assist unit.)
S7.10.1 Regular procedure. (This test need not be run if the option in S7.10.2 is selected.) On vehicles with brake power assist units, render the brake power assist unit inoperative, or one of the brake power assist unit subsystems if two or more subsystems are provided, by disconnecting the relevant power supply. Exhaust any residual brake power reserve capability of the disconnected system. On vehicles with brake power units, disconnect the primary source of power. Make four stops, each from 60 mph by a continuous application of the service brake control. Restore the system to normal at completion of this test. For vehicles equipped with more than one brake power unit or brake power assist unit, conduct tests of each in turn.
S7.10.2 Optional Procedures. On vehicles with brake power assist units, the unit is charged to maximum prior to start of test. (Engine may be run up in speed, then throttle closed quickly to attain maximum charge on vacuum assist units.) Brake power units shall also be charged to maximum accumulator pressure prior to start of test. No recharging is allowed after start of test.
(a) (For vehicles with brake power assist units.) Disconnect the primary source of power. Make six stops each from 60 mph, to achieve the average deceleration for each stop as specified in table III. Apply the brake control as quickly as possible. Maintain control force until vehicle has stopped.
At the completion of the stops specified above, deplete the system of any residual brake power reserve capability. Make one stop from 60 mph at an average deceleration of not lower than 7 fpsps for passenger cars (equivalent stopping distance 554 feet), or 6 fpsps for vehicles other than passenger cars (equivalent stopping distance 646 feet) and determine whether the control force exceeds 150 pounds.
(b) (For vehicles with brake power units with accumulator type systems.) Test as in S7.10.2(a), except make 10 stops instead of 6 and, at the completion of the 10 stops, deplete the failed element of the brake power unit of any residual brake power reserve capability before making the final stop.
(c) (For vehicles with brake power assist or brake power units with backup systems.) If the brake power or brake power assist unit operates in conjunction with a backup system and the backup system is activated automatically in the event of a primary power failure, the backup system is operative during this test. Disconnect the primary source of power of one subsystem. Make 15 stops, each from 60 mph, with the backup system activated for the failed subsystem, to achieve an average deceleration of 12 fpsps for each stop.
(d) Restore systems to normal at completion of these tests. For vehicles equipped with more than one brakepower assist or brakepower unit, conduct tests of each in turn.
S7.10.3 Electric brakes.
(a) For vehicles with electrically-actuated service brakes, the tests in S7.10.1 or S7.10.2 are conducted with any single electrical failure in the electric brake system instead of the brake power or brake power assist systems, and all other systems intact.
(b) For EVs with RBS that is part of the service brake system, the tests in S7.10.1 or S7.10.2 are conducted with the RBS discontinued and all other systems intact.
S7.11 Service brake system—first fade and recovery test.
S7.11.1 Baseline check stops or snubs.
S7.11.1.1 Vehicles with GVWR of 10,000 lb or less. Make three stops from 30 mph at 10 fpsps for each stop. Control force readings may be terminated when vehicle speed falls to 5 mph. Average the maximum brake control force required for the three stops.
S7.11.1.2 Vehicles with GVWR greater than 10,000 pounds. With transmission in neutral (or declutched), make three snubs from 40 to 20 mph at 10 fpsps for each snub. Average the maximum brake control force required for the three snubs.
S7.11.2 Fade stops or snubs.
S7.11.2.1 Vehicles with GVWR of 10,000 pounds or less. Make 5 stops from 60 mph at 15 fpsps followed by 5 stops at the maximum attainable deceleration between 5 and 15 fpsps for each stop. Establish an initial brake temperature before the first brake application of 130° to 150 °F. Initial brake temperatures before brake applications for subsequent stops are those occurring at the distance intervals. Attain the required deceleration within 1 second and, as a minimum, maintain it for the remainder of the stopping time. Control force readings may be terminated when vehicle speed falls to 5 mph. Leave an interval of 0.4 mi between the start of brake applications. Accelerate immediately to the initial test speed after each stop. Drive 1 mi at 30 mph after the last fade stop, and immediately follow the recovery procedure specified in S7.11.3.1.
S7.11.2.2 Vehicles with GVWR greater than 10,000 lb. With transmission in neutral (or declutched) make 10 snubs from 40 to 20 mph at 10 fpsps for each snub. Establish an initial brake temperature before the first brake application of 130 °F. to 150 °F. Initial brake temperatures before brake application for subsequent snubs are those occurring in the time intervals specified below. Attain the required deceleration within 1 s and maintain it for the remainder of the snubbing time. Leave an interval of 30s between snubs (start of brake application to start of brake application). Accelerate immediately to the initial test speed after each snub. Drive for 1.5 mi at 40 mph after the last snub and immediately follow the recovery procedure specified in S7.11.3.2.
S7.11.3 Recovery stops or snubs.
S7.11.3.1 Vehicles with GVWR of 10,000 lb or less. Make five stops from 30 mph at 10 fpsps for each stop. Control force readings may be terminated when vehicle speed falls to 5 mph. Allow a braking distance interval of 1 mi. Immediately after each stop accelerate at maximum rate to 30 mph and maintain that speed until making the next stop. Record the maximum control force for each stop.
S7.11.3.2 Vehicles with GVWR greater than 10,000 lb. With transmission in neutral (or declutched) make five snubs from 40 to 20 mph at 10 fpsps for each snub. After each snub, accelerate at maximum rate to 40 mph and maintain that speed until making the next brake application at a point 1.5 mi from the point of the previous brake application. Record the maximum control force for each snub.
S7.12 Service brake system—second reburnish. Repeat S7.6.
S7.13 Service brake system—second fade and recovery test. Repeat S7.11 except in S7.11.2 run 15 fade stops or 20 snubs instead of 10.
S7.14 Third reburnish. Repeat S7.6.
S7.15 Service brake system—fourth effectiveness test. Repeat S7.5. Then (for passenger cars) make four stops from either 95 mph if the speed attainable in 2 mi is 99 to (but not including) 104 mph, or 100 mph if the speed attainable in 2 mi is 104 mph or greater.
S7.16 Service brake system—water recovery test.
S7.16.1 Baseline check stop. Make three stops from 30 mph at 10 fpsps for each stop. Control force readings may be terminated when vehicle speed falls to 5 mph. Average the maximum brake control force required for the three stops.
S7.16.2 Wet brake recovery stops. With the brakes fully released at all times, drive the vehicle for 2 min at a speed of 5 mph in any combination of forward and reverse directions, through a trough having a water depth of 6 in. After leaving the trough, immediately accelerate at a maximum rate to 30 mph without a brake application. Immediately upon reaching that speed make five stops, each from 30 mph at 10 fpsps for each stop. After each stop (except the last), accelerate the vehicle immediately at a maximum rate to a speed of 30 mph and begin the next stop.
S7.17 Spike stops. Make 10 successive spike stops from 30 mph with the transmission in neutral, with no reverse stops. Make spike stops by applying a control force of 200 lb while recording control force versus time. Maintain control force until vehicle has stopped. At completion of 10 spike stops, make six effectiveness stops from 60 mph.
S7.18 Final inspection. Inspect—
(a) The service brake system for detachment or fracture of any components, such as brake springs and brake shoes or disc pad facing.
(b) The friction surface of the brake, the master cylinder or brake power unit reservoir cover and seal and filler openings, for leakage of brake fluid or lubricant.
(c) The master cylinder or brake power unit reservoir for compliance with the volume and labeling requirements of S5.4.2 and S5.4.3. In determining the fully applied worn condition assume that the lining is worn to: (1) Rivet or bolt heads on riveted or bolted linings, or (2) within one thirty-seconds of an inch of shoe or pad mounting surface on bonded linings, or (3) the limit recommended by the manufacturer, whichever is larger relative to the total possible shoe or pad movement. Drums or rotors are assumed to be at nominal design drum diameter or rotor thickness. Linings are assumed adjusted for normal operating clearance in the released position.
(d) The brake system indicator light(s), for compliance with operation in various key positions, lens color, labeling, and location, in accordance with S5.3.
S7.19 Moving barrier test. (Only for vehicles that have been tested according to S7.7.2.) Load the vehicle to GVWR, release parking brake, and place the transmission selector control to engage the parking mechanism. With a moving barrier as described in paragraph 4.3 of SAE recommended practice J972 “Moving Barrier Collision Tests,” Nov. 1966 (revised May 2000), impact the vehicle from the front at 21/2mph. This incorporation by reference was approved by the Director of the Federal Register in accordance with 5 U.S.C. 552(a) and 1 CFR part 51. Copies may be obtained from the Society of Automotive Engineers, Inc., 400 Commonwealth Drive, Warrendale, PA 15096–0001. Copies may be inspected at the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration, Technical Information Services, 400 Seventh Street, SW., Plaza Level, Room 403, Washington, DC 20590, or at the National Archives and Records Administration (NARA). For information on the availability of this material at NARA, call 202–741–6030, or go to: http://www.archives.gov/federal_register/code_of_federal_regulations/ibr_locations.html . Keep the longitudinal axis of the barrier parallel with the longitudinal axis of the vehicle. Repeat the test, impacting the vehicle from the rear.
Note: The vehicle used for this test need not be the same vehicle that has been used for the braking tests.
Figure 1—Typical Plug Thermocouple InstallationsView or download PDF Note: The second thermocouple shall be installed at .080 inch depth within 1 inch circumferentially of the thermocouple installed at .040 inch depth.
View or download PDFTable I—Brake Test Procedure Sequence and Requirements
| Sequence | Test load | Test procedure | Requirements |
|---|
| Light | GVWR |
|---|
| 1. Instrumentation check | | | S7.2 | |
| 2. First (preburnish) effectiveness test | | X | S7.3 | S5.1.1.1 |
| 3. Burnish procedure | | X | S7.4 | |
| 4. Second effectiveness test | | X | S7.5(b) | S5.1.1.2 |
| 5. First reburnish | | X | S7.6 | |
| 6. Parking brake | X | X | S7.7 | S5.2 |
| 7. Stability and control during braking (braking-in-a-curve test) | X | | S7.5(a) | S5.1.7 |
| 8. Third effectiveness (lightly loaded vehicle) | X | | S7.8 | S5.1.1.3 |
| 9. Partial failure | X | X | S7.9 | S5.1.2 |
| 10. Inoperative brake power and power assist units | | X | S7.10 | S5.1.3 |
| 11. First fade and recovery | | X | S7.11 | S5.1.4 |
| 12. Second reburnish | | X | S7.12 | |
| 13. Second fade and recovery | | X | S7.13 | S5.1.4 |
| 14. Third reburnish | | X | S7.14 | |
| 15. Fourth effectiveness | | X | S7.15 | S5.1.1.4 |
| 16. Water recovery | | X | S7.16 | S5.1.5 |
| 17. Spike stops | | X | S7.17 | S5.1.6 |
| 18. Final inspection | | | S7.18 | S5.6 |
| 19. Moving barrier test | | X | S7.19 | S5.2.2.3 |
View or download PDFTable III—Inoperative Brake Power Assist and Brake Power Units
| Stop No. | Average deceleration, FPSPS | Equivalent stopping distance, feet |
|---|
| Column 1—brake power assist | Column 2—brake power unit | Column 3—brake power assist | Column 4—brake power unit |
|---|
| (a) | (b) and (c) | (a) | (b) and (c) | (a) | (b) and (c) | (a) | (b) and (c) |
|---|
| 1 | 16.0 | 14.0 | 16.0 | 13.0 | 242 | 277 | 242 | 298 |
| 2 | 12.0 | 12.0 | 13.0 | 11.0 | 323 | 323 | 298 | 352 |
| 3 | 10.0 | 10.0 | 12.0 | 10.0 | 388 | 388 | 323 | 388 |
| 4 | 9.0 | 8.5 | 11.0 | 9.5 | 431 | 456 | 352 | 409 |
| 5 | 8.0 | 7.5 | 10.0 | 9.0 | 484 | 517 | 388 | 431 |
| 6 | 7.5 | 6.7 | 9.5 | 8.5 | 517 | 580 | 409 | 456 |
| 7 | 17.0 | 16.0 | 9.0 | 8.0 | 554 | 646 | 431 | 484 |
| 8 | NA | NA | 8.5 | 7.5 | NA | NA | 456 | 517 |
| 9 | NA | NA | 8.0 | 7.0 | NA | NA | 484 | 554 |
| 10 | NA | NA | 7.5 | 6.5 | NA | NA | 517 | 596 |
| 11 | NA | NA | 17.0 | 16.0 | NA | NA | 554 | 646 |
[41 FR 29696, July 19, 1976]
Editorial Note:
ForFederal Registercitations affecting §571.106 see the List of CFR Sections Affected which appears in the Finding Aids section of the printed volume and on GPO Access.§ 571.106 Standard No. 106; Brake hoses.
top
S1. Scope. This standard specifies labeling and performance requirements for motor vehicle brake hose, brake hose assemblies, and brake hose end fittings.
S2. Purpose. The purpose of this standard is to reduce deaths and injuries occurring as a result of brake system failure from pressure or vacuum loss due to hose or hose assembly rupture.
S3. Application. This standard applies to passenger cars, multipurpose passenger vehicles, trucks, buses, trailers, and motorcycles, and to hydraulic, air, and vacuum brake hose, brake hose assemblies, and brake hose end fittings for use in those vehicles.
S4. Definitions.
Armor means protective material installed on a brake hose to increase the resistance of the hose or hose assembly to abrasion or impact damage.
Brake hose means a flexible conduit, other than a vacuum tubing connector, manufactured for use in a brake system to transmit or contain the fluid pressure or vacuum used to apply force to a vehicle's brakes. For hose, a dimensional description such as “1/4-inch hose” refers to the nominal inside diameter. For tubing, a dimensional description such as “1/4-in tubing” refers to the nominal outside diameter.
Brake hose assembly means a brake hose, with or without armor, equipped with end fittings for use in a brake system, but does not include an air or vacuum assembly prepared by the owner or operator of a used vehicle, by his employee, or by a repair facility, for installation in that used vehicle.
Brake hose end fitting means a coupler, other than a clamp, designed for attachment to the end of a brake hose.
Free length means the linear measurement of hose exposed between the end fittings of a hose assembly in a straight position.
Permanently attached end fitting means an end fitting that is attached by deformation of the fitting about the hose by crimping or swaging, or an end fitting that is attached by use of a sacrificial sleeve or ferrule that requires replacement each time a hose assembly is rebuilt.
Preformed means a brake hose that is manufactured with permanent bends and is shaped to fit a specific vehicle without further bending.
Rupture means any failure that results in separation of a brake hose from its end fitting or in leakage.
Vacuum tubing connector means a flexible conduit of vacuum that (i) connects metal tubing to metal tubing in a brake system, (ii) is attached without end fittings, and (iii) when installed, has an unsupported length less than the total length of those portions that cover the metal tubing.
S5. Requirements—hydraulic brake hose, brake hose assemblies, and brake hose end fittings.
S5.1 Construction. (a) Each hydraulic brake hose assembly shall have permanently attached brake hose end fittings which are attached by deformation of the fitting about the hose by crimping or swaging.
(b) Each hydraulic brake hose assembly that is equipped with a permanent supplemental support integrally attached to the assembly and is manufactured as a replacement for use on a vehicle not equipped, as an integral part of the vehicle's original design, with a means of attaching the support to the vehicle shall be equipped with a bracket that is integrally attached to the supplemental support and that adapts the vehicle to properly accept this type of brake hose assembly.
S5.2 Labeling.
S5.2.1 Each hydraulic brake hose, except hose sold as part of a motor vehicle, shall have at least two clearly identifiable stripes of at least one-sixteenth of an inch in width, placed on opposite sides of the brake hose parallel to its longitudinal axis. One stripe may be interrupted by the information required by S5.2.2, and the other stripe may be interrupted by additional information at the manufacturer's option. However, hydraulic brake hose manufactured for use only in an assembly whose end fittings prevent its installation in a twisted orientation in either side of the vehicle, need not meet the requirements of S5.2.1.
S5.2.2 Each hydraulic brake hose shall be labeled, or cut from bulk hose that is labeled, at intervals of not more than 6 inches, measured from the end of one legend to the beginning of the next, in block capital letters and numerals at least one-eighth of an inch high, with the information listed in paragraphs (a) through (e) of this section. The information need not be present on hose that is sold as part of a brake hose assembly or a motor vehicle.
(a) The symbol DOT, constituting a certification by the hose manufacturer that the hose conforms to all applicable motor vehicle safety standards.
(b) A designation that identifies the manufacturer of the hose, which shall be filed in writing with: Office of Vehicle Safety Compliance, Equipment Division NVS–222, National Highway Traffic Safety Administration, 400 Seventh St. SW., Washington, DC 20590. The marking may consist of a designation other than block capital letters required by S5.2.2.
(c) The month, day, and year, or the month and year, of manufacture, expressed in numerals. For example, 10/1/96 means October 1, 1996.
(d) The nominal inside diameter of the hose expressed in inches or fractions of inches, or in millimeters followed by the abbreviation “mm.”
(e) Either “HR” to indicate that the hose is regular expansion hydraulic hose or “HL” to indicate that the hose is low expansion hydraulic hose.
S5.2.3 Package labeling for brake hose assemblies designed to be used with a supplemental support. (a) Each hydraulic brake hose assembly that is equipped with a permanent supplemental support integrally attached to the assembly and is manufactured as a replacement assembly for a vehicle equipped, as an integral part of the vehicle's original design, with a means of attaching the support to the vehicle shall be sold in a package that is marked or labeled as follows: “FOR USE ON [ insert Manufacturer, Model Name ] ONLY”;
(b) Each hydraulic brake hose assembly that is equipped with a permanent supplemental support integrally attached to the assembly and is manufactured as a replacement for use on a vehicle not equipped, as an integral part of the vehicle's original design, with a means of attaching the support to the vehicle shall comply with paragraphs (a) (1) and (2) of this section:
(1) Be sold in a package that is marked or labeled as follows: “FOR USE ONLY WITH A SUPPLEMENTAL SUPPORT.”
(2) Be accompanied by clear, detailed instructions explaining the proper installation of the brake hose and the supplemental support bracket to the vehicle and the consequences of not attaching the supplemental support bracket to the vehicle. The instructions shall be printed on or included in the package specified in paragraph (a)(1) of this section.
S5.2.4 Each hydraulic brake hose assembly, except those sold as part of a motor vehicle, shall be labeled by means of a band around the brake hose assembly as specified in this paragraph or, at the option of the manufacturer, by means of labeling as specified in S5.2.4.1. The band may at the manufacturer's option be attached so as to move freely along the length of the assembly, as long as it is retained by the end fittings. The band shall be etched, embossed, or stamped in block capital letters, numerals or symbols at least one-eighth of an inch high, with the following information:
(a) The symbol DOT constituting certification by the hose assembler that the hose assembly conforms to all applicable motor vehicle safety standards.
(b) A designation that identifies the manufacturer of the hose assembly, which shall be filed in writing with: Office of Vehicle Safety Compliance, Equipment Division NVS–222, National Highway Traffic Safety Administration, 400 Seventh St. SW., Washington, DC 20590. The designation may consist of block capital letters, numerals or a symbol.
S5.2.4.1 At least one end fitting of a hydraulic brake hose assembly shall be etched, stamped or embossed with a designation at least one-sixteenth of an inch high that identifies the manufacturer of the hose assembly and is filed in accordance with S5.2.4(b).
S5.3 Test requirements. A hydraulic brake hose assembly or appropriate part thereof shall be capable of meeting any of the requirements set forth under this heading, when tested under the conditions of S13 and the applicable procedures of S6. However, a particular hose assembly or appropriate part thereof need not meet further requirements after having been subjected to and having met the constriction requirement (S5.3.1) and any one of the requirements specified in S5.3.2 through S5.3.13.
S5.3.1 Constriction. Except for that part of an end fitting which does not contain hose, every inside diameter of any section of a hydraulic brake hose assembly shall be not less than 64 percent of the nominal inside diameter of the brake hose (S6.12).
S5.3.2 Expansion and burst strength. The maximum expansion of a hydraulic brake hose assembly at 1,000 psi, 1,500 psi and 2,900 psi shall not exceed the values specified in Table I (S6.1), except that a brake hose larger than3/16inch or 5 mm is not subject to the 2,900 psi expansion test requirements. The hydraulic brake hose assembly shall then withstand water pressure of 4,000 psi for 2 minutes without rupture, and then shall not rupture at less than 7,000 psi for a1/8inch, 3 mm, or smaller diameter hose, or at less than 5,000 psi for a hose with a diameter larger than1/8inch or 3 mm (S6.2).
Table I—Maximum Expansion of Free Length Brake Hose, CC/FT
| Hydraulic brake hose, inside diameter | Test pressure |
|---|
| 1,000 psi | 1,500 psi | 2,900 psi |
|---|
Regular expansion hose | Low expansion hose | Low expansion hose | Regular expansion hose | Regular expansion hose | Low expansion hose |
|---|
| 1/8 inch, or 3mm, or less | 0.66 | 0.33 | 0.79 | 0.42 | 1.21 | 0.61 |
| >
1/8 inch or 3mm, to
3/16 inch or 5 mm | 0.86 | 0.55 | 1.02 | 0.72 | 1.67 | 0.91 |
| >
3/16 inch or 5 mm | 1.04 | 0.82 | 1.30 | 1.17 | * | * |
S5.3.3 Whip resistance. A hydraulic brake hose assembly shall not rupture when run continuously on a flexing machine for 35 hours (S6.3).
S5.3.4 Tensile strength. A hydraulic brake hose assembly shall withstand a pull of 325 pounds without separation of the hose from its end fittings during a slow pull test, and shall withstand a pull of 370 pounds without separation of the hose from its end fittings during a fast pull test (S6.4).
S5.3.5 Water absorption and burst strength. A hydraulic brake hose assembly, after immersion in water for 70 hours (S6.5), shall withstand water pressure of 4,000 psi for 2 minutes, and then shall not rupture at less than 5,000 psi (S6.2).
S5.3.6 Water absorption and tensile strength. A hydraulic brake hose assembly, after immersion in water for 70 hours (S6.5), shall withstand a pull of 325 pounds without separation of the hose from its end fittings during a slow pull test, and shall withstand a pull of 370 pounds without separation of the hose from its end fittings during a fast pull test (S6.4).
S5.3.7 Water absorption and whip resistance. A hydraulic brake hose assembly, after immersion in water for 70 hours (S6.5), shall not rupture when run continuously on a flexing machine for 35 hours (S6.3).
S5.3.8 Low-temperature resistance. A hydraulic brake hose conditioned at a temperature between minus 49 degrees Fahrenheit (minus 45 degrees Celsius) and minus 54 degrees Fahrenheit (minus 48 degrees Celsius) for 70 hours shall not show cracks visible without magnification when bent around a cylinder as specified in S6.6 (S6.6).
S5.3.9 Brake fluid compatibility, constriction, and burst strength. Except for brake hose assemblies designed for use with mineral or petroleum-based brake fluids, a hydraulic brake hose assembly shall meet the constriction requirement of S5.3.1 after having been subjected to a temperature of 248 degrees Fahrenheit (120 degrees Celsius) for 70 hours while filled with SAE RM–66–04 “Compatibility Fluid,” as described in appendix B of SAE Standard J1703, revised JAN 1995, “Motor Vehicle Brake Fluid.” This incorporation by reference was approved by the Director of the Federal Register in accordance with 5 U.S.C. 552(a) and 1 CFR Part 51. Copies may be obtained from the Society of Automotive Engineers, Inc., 400 Commonwealth Drive, Warrendale, PA 15096–0001. Copies may be inspected at the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration, Technical Information Services, 400 Seventh Street, SW., Plaza Level, Room 403, Washington, DC 20590, or at the National Archives and Records Administration (NARA). For information on the availability of this material at NARA, call 202–741–6030, or go to: http://www.archives.gov/federal_register/code_of_federal_regulations/ibr_locations.html. It shall then withstand water pressure of 4,000 psi for 2 minutes and thereafter shall not rupture at less than 5,000 psi (S6.2 except all sizes of hose are tested at 5,000 psi).
S5.3.10 Ozone resistance. A hydraulic brake hose shall not show cracks visible under 7-power magnification after exposure to ozone for 70 hours at 104°F. (S6.8).
S5.3.12 High temperature impulse test. A brake hose assembly tested under the conditions in S6.10:
(a) Shall withstand pressure cycling for 150 cycles, at 295 degrees Fahrenheit (146 degrees Celsius) without leakage;
(b) Shall not rupture during a 2-minute, 4,000 psi pressure hold test, and;
(c) Shall not burst at a pressure less than 5,000 psi.
S5.3.13 End fitting corrosion resistance. After 24 hours of exposure to salt spray, a hydraulic brake hose end fitting shall show no base metal corrosion on the end fitting surface except where crimping or the application of labeling information has caused displacement of the protective coating (S6.11).
S6. Test procedures—Hydraulic brake hose, brake hose assemblies, and brake hose end fittings.
S6.1. Expansion test.
S6.1.1 Apparatus. Utilize a test apparatus (as shown in Figure 1) which consists of:
(a) Source for required fluid pressure;
(b) Test fluid of water without any additives and free of gases;
(c) Reservoir for test fluid;
(d) Pressure gauges;
(e) Brake hose end fittings in which to mount the hose vertically; and
(f) Graduate burette with 0.05 cc increments.
Fig. 1—Expansion Test ApparatusView or download PDF S6.1.2 Preparation. (a) Measure the free length of the hose assembly.
(b) Mount the hose so that it is in a vertical straight position without tension when pressure is applied.
(c) Fill the hose with test fluid and bleed all gases from the system.
(d) Close the valve to the burette and apply 1,500 psi for 10 seconds; then release pressure.
S6.1.3 Calculation of expansion at 1,000 and 1,500 psi. (a) Adjust the fluid level in the burette to zero.
(b) Close the valve to the burette, apply pressure at the rate of 15,000 psi per minute, and seal 1,000 psi in the hose (1,500 psi in the second series, and 2,900 psi in the third series).
(c) After 3 seconds open the valve to the burette for 10 seconds and allow the fluid in the expanded hose to rise into the burette.
(d) Repeat the procedure in steps (b) and (c) twice. Measure the amount of test fluid which has accumulated in the burette as a result of the three applications of pressure.
(e) Calculate the volumetric expansion per foot by dividing the total accumulated test fluid by 3 and further dividing by the free length of the hose in feet.
S6.2 Burst strength test. (a) Connect the brake hose to a pressure system and fill it completely with water, allowing all gases to escape.
(b) Apply water pressure of 4,000 psi at a rate of 15,000 psi per minute.
(c) After 2 minutes at 4,000 psi, increase the pressure at the rate of 15,000 psi per minute until the pressure exceeds 5,000 psi for a brake hose larger than1/8inch or 3 mm diameter, or until the pressure exceeds 7,000 psi for a brake hose of1/8inch, 3 mm, or smaller diameter.
S6.3 Whip resistance test.
S6.3.1 Apparatus. Utilize test apparatus that is dynamically balanced and includes:
(a) A movable header consisting of a horizontal bar equipped with capped end fittings and mounted through bearings at each end to points 4 inches from the center of two vertically rotating disks whose edges are in the same vertical plane;
(b) An adjustable stationary header parallel to the movable header in the same horizontal plane as the centers of the disks, and fitted with open end fittings;
(c) An elapsed time indicator; and
(d) A source of water pressure connected to the open end fittings.
S6.3.2 Preparation. (a) Except for the supplemental support specified in S6.3.2(d), remove all external appendages including, but not limited to, hose armor, chafing collars, mounting brackets, date band and spring guards.
(b) Measure the hose free length.
(c) Mount the hose in the whip test machine, introducing slack as specified in Table II for the size hose tested, measuring the projected length parallel to the axis of the rotating disks. The manufacturer may, at his option, adapt the fitting attachment points to permit mounting hose assemblies equipped with angled or other special fittings in the same orientation as hose assemblies equipped with straight fittings.
(d) In the case of a brake hose assembly equipped with a permanent supplemental support integrally attached to the assembly, the assembly may be mounted using the supplemental support and associated means of simulating its attachment to the vehicle. Mount the supplemental support in the same vertical and horizontal planes as the stationary header end of the whip test fixture described in S6.3.1(b). Mount or attach the supplemental support so that it is positioned in accordance with the recommendation of the assembly manufacturer for attaching the supplemental support on a vehicle.
| Free length between end fittings, inches | Slack, inches |
|---|
| 1/8 inch or 3 mm hose or less | More than
1/8 inch or 3 mm hose |
|---|
| 8 to 15
1/2, inclusive | 1.750 | |
| 10 to 15
1/2, inclusive | | 1,000 |
| Over 15
1/2 to 19 inclusive | 1.250 | |
| Over 19 to 24, inclusive | 0.750 | |
S6.3.3 Operation. (a) Apply 235 psi water pressure and bleed all gases from the system.
(b) Drive the movable head at 800 rpm.
S6.4 Tensile strength test. Utilize a tension testing machine conforming to the requirements of American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) E4–03, “Standard Practices for Force Verification of Testing Machines,” and provided with a recording device to measure the force applied. This incorporation by reference was approved by the Director of the Federal Register in accordance with 5 U.S.C. 552(a) and 1 CFR Part 51. Copies may be obtained from the American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) International, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, P.O. Box C700, West Conshohocken, PA 19428–2959. Copies may be inspected at the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration, Technical Information Services, 400 Seventh St., S.W., Plaza Level, Room 403, Washington, D.C. 20590, or at the National Archives and Records Administration (NARA). For information on the availability of this material at NARA, call 202–741–6030, or go to: http://www.archives.gov/federal_register/code_of_federal_regulations/ibr_locations.html.
S6.4.1 Preparation. Mount the hose assembly to ensure straight, evenly distributed machine pull.
S6.4.2 Operation. (a) Conduct the slow pull test by applying tension at a rate of 1 inch per minute travel of the moving head until separation occurs.
(b) Conduct the fast pull test by applying tension at a rate of 2 inches per minute travel of the moving head until separation occurs.
S6.5 Water absorption sequence tests. (a) Prepare three brake hose assemblies and measure the free length of the hose assemblies.
(b) Immerse the brake hose assemblies in distilled water at 185 degrees Fahrenheit (85 degrees Celsius) for 70 hours. Remove the brake hose assemblies from the water and condition in air at room temperature for 30 minutes.
(c) Conduct the tests in S6.2, S6.3, and S6.4, using a different hose for each sequence.
S6.6 Low temperature resistance test.
S6.6.1 Preparation. (a) Remove hose armor, if any, and condition the hose in a straight position in air at a temperature between minus 49 degrees Fahrenheit and minus 54 degrees Fahrenheit (minus 45 degrees Celsius and minus 48 degrees Celsius) for 70 hours.
(b) Condition a cylinder in air at a temperature between minus 49 degrees Fahrenheit and minus 54 degrees Fahrenheit (minus 45 degrees Celsius and minus 48 degrees Celsius) for 70 hours, using a cylinder of 21/2inches in diameter for tests of hose less than1/8inch or 3mm, 3 inches in diameter for tests of1/8inch or 3 mm hose, 31/2inches in diameter for tests of3/16to1/4inch hose or 4 mm to 6 mm hose, and 4 inches in diameter for tests of hose greater than1/4inch or 6 mm in diameter.
S6.6.2 Flexibility testing. Bend the conditioned hose 180 degrees around the conditioned cylinder at a steady rate in a period of 3 to 5 seconds. Examine without magnification for cracks.
S6.7 Brake fluid compatibility test.
S6.7.1 Preparation. (a) Attach a hose assembly below a 1-pint reservoir filled with 100 ml. of SAE RM–66–04 Compatibility Fluid as shown in Figure 2. (SAE RM–66–03 Compatibility Fluid, as described in appendix A of SAE Standard J1703 NOV83, “Motor Vehicle Brake Fluid,” November 1983, may be used in place of SAE RM–66–04 until January 1, 1995.)
(b) Fill the hose assembly with brake fluid, seal the lower end, and place the test assembly in an oven in a vertical position.
View or download PDF S6.7.2 Oven treatment. (a) Condition the hose assembly at 200 °F. for 70 hours.
(b) Cool the hose assembly at room temperature for 30 minutes.
(c) Drain the brake hose assembly, immediately determine that every inside diameter of any section of the hose assembly, except for that part of an end fitting which does not contain hose, is not less than 64 percent of the nominal inside diameter of the hose, and conduct the test specified in S6.2.
S6.8 Ozone resistance test. Utilize a cylinder with a diameter eight times the nominal outside diameter of the brake hose excluding armor.
S6.8.1 Preparation. After removing any armor, bind a hydraulic brake hose 360° around the cylinder. In the case of hose shorter than the circumference of the cylinder, bend the hose so that as much of its length as possible is in contact.
S6.8.2 Exposure to ozone. (a) Condition the hose on the cylinder in air at room temperature for 24 hours.
(b) Immediately thereafter, condition the hose on the cylinder for 70 hours in an exposure chamber having an ambient air temperature of 104 degrees Fahrenheit (40 degrees Celsius) during the test and containing air mixed with ozone in the proportion of 100 parts of ozone per 100 million parts of air by volume.
(c) Examine the hose for cracks under 7-power magnification, ignoring areas immediately adjacent to or within the area covered by binding.
S6.9 End fitting corrosion resistance test. Utilize the apparatus described in ASTM B117–64, “Salt Spray (Fog) Testing”.
S6.9 Dynamic ozone test.
S6.9.1 Apparatus. Utilize a test apparatus shown in Figure 3 which is constructed so that:
(a) It has a fixed pin with a vertical orientation over which one end of the brake hose is installed.
(b) It has a movable pin that is oriented 30 degrees from vertical, with the top of the movable pin angled towards the fixed pin. The moveable pin maintains its orientation to the fixed pin throughout its travel in the horizontal plane. The other end of the brake hose is installed on the movable pin.
View or download PDF S6.9.2 Preparation. (a) Precondition the hose assembly by laying it on a flat surface in an unstressed condition, at room temperature, for 24 hours.
(b) Cut the brake hose assembly to a length of 8.6 inches (218 mm), such that no end fittings remain on the cut hose.
(c) Mount the brake hose onto the test fixture by fully inserting the fixture pins into each end of the hose. Secure the hose to the fixture pins using a band clamp at each end of the hose.
(d) Place the test fixture into an ozone chamber
(e) Stabilize the atmosphere in the ozone chamber so that the ambient temperature is 104 °F (40 degrees Celsius) and the air mixture contains air mixed with ozone in the proportion of 100 parts of ozone per 100 million parts of air by volume. This atmosphere is to remain stable throughout the remainder of the test.
(f) Begin cycling the movable pin at a rate of 0.3 Hz. Continue the cycling for 48 hours.
(g) At the completion of 48 hours of cycling, remove the test fixture from the ozone chamber. Without removing the hose from the test fixture, visually examine the hose for cracks without magnification, ignoring areas immediately adjacent to or within the area covered by the band clamps. Examine the hose with the movable pin at any point along its travel.
S6.10 High temperature impulse test.
S6.10.1 Apparatus. (a) A pressure cycling machine to which one end of the brake hose assembly can be attached, with the entire hose assembly installed vertically inside of a circulating air oven. The machine shall be capable of increasing the pressure in the hose from zero psi to 1600 psi, and decreasing the pressure in the hose from 1600 psi to zero psi, within 2 seconds.
(b) A circulating air oven that can reach a temperature of 295 degrees Fahrenheit (146 degrees Celsius) within 30 minutes, and that can maintain a constant 295 degrees F (146 degrees Celsius) thereafter, with the brake hose assembly inside of the oven and attached to the pressure cycling machine.
(c) A burst test apparatus to conduct testing specified in S6.2
S6.10.2 Preparation. (a) Connect one end of the hose assembly to the pressure cycling machine and plug the other end of the hose. Fill the pressure cycling machine and hose assembly with SAE RM–66–04 “Compatibility Fluid,” as described in appendix B of SAE Standard J1703, revised JAN 1995 “Motor Vehicle Brake Fluid,” and bleed all gases from the system.
(b) Place the brake hose assembly inside of the circulating air oven in a vertical position. Increase the oven temperature to 295 degrees F (146 degrees Celsius) and maintain this temperature throughout the pressure cycling test.
(c) During each pressure cycle, the pressure in the hose is increased from zero psi to 1600 psi and held constant for 1 minute, then the pressure is decreased from 1600 psi to zero psi and held constant for 1 minute. Perform 150 pressure cycles on the brake hose assembly.
(d) Remove the brake hose assembly from the oven, disconnect it from the pressure cycling machine, and drain the fluid from the hose. Cool the brake hose assembly at room temperature for 45 minutes.
(e) Wipe the brake hose using acetone to remove residual Compatibility Fluid. Conduct the burst strength test in S6.2, except all sizes of hose are tested at 5,000 psi.
S6.11 End fitting corrosion test. Utilize the apparatus described in ASTM B117–03, “Standard Practice for Operating Salt Spray (Fog) Apparatus”. This incorporation by reference was approved by the Director of the Federal Register in accordance with 5 U.S.C. 552(a) and 1 CFR Part 51. Copies may be obtained from the American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) International, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, P.O. Box C700, West Conshohocken, PA 19428–2959. Copies may be inspected at the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration, Technical Information Services, 400 Seventh St., SW., Plaza Level, Room 403, Washington, DC 20590, or at the National Archives and Records Administration (NARA). For information on the availability of this material at NARA, call (202) 741–6030, or go to: http://www.archives.gov/federal_register/code_of_federal_regulations/ibr_locations.html.
S6.11.1 Construction. Construct the salt spray chamber so that:
(a) The construction material does not affect the corrosiveness of the fog.
(b) The hose assembly is supported or suspended 30 degrees from the vertical and parallel to the principal direction of the horizontal flow of fog through the chamber.
(c) The hose assembly does not contact any metallic material or any material capable of acting as a wick
(d) Condensation which falls from the assembly does not return to the solution reservoir for respraying.
(e) Condensation from any source does not fall on the brake hose assemblies or the solution collectors.
(f) Spray from the nozzles is not directed onto the hose assembly.
S6.11.2 Preparation. (a) Plug each end of the hose assembly.
(b) Mix a salt solution five parts by weight of sodium chloride to 95 parts of distilled water, using sodium chloride substantially free of nickel and copper, and containing on a dry basis not more than 0.1 percent of sodium iodide and not more than 0.3 percent total impurities. Ensure that the solution is free of suspended solids before the solution is atomized.
(c) After atomization at 95 degrees Fahrenheit (35 degrees Celsius), ensure that the collected solution is in the PH range of 6.5 to 7.2. Make the PH measurements at 77 degrees Fahrenheit (28 degrees Celsius).
(d) Maintain a compressed air supply to the nozzle or nozzles free of oil and dirt and between 10 and 25 psi.
S6.11.3 Operation. Subject the brake hose assembly to the salt spray continuously for 24 hours.
(a) Regulate the mixture so that each collector will collect from 1 to 2 milliliters of solution per hour for each 80 square centimeters of horizontal collecting area.
(b) Maintain exposure zone temperature at 95 degrees Fahrenheit (35 degrees Celsius).
(c) Upon completion, remove the salt deposit from the surface of the hose by washing gently or dipping in clean running water not warmer than 100 degrees Fahrenheit (38 degrees Celsius) and then drying immediately.
S6.12 Constriction test. Brake hose constriction test requirements shall be met using at least one of the methods specified in S6.12.1, S6.12.2, or S6.12.3.
S6.12.1 Plug gauge. (a) Utilize a plug gauge as shown in Figure 4. Diameter “A” is equal to 64 percent of the nominal inside diameter of the hydraulic brake hose being tested.
(b) Brake hose assemblies that are to be used for additional testing have constriction testing only at each end fitting. Other brake hose assemblies may be cut into 3-inch lengths to permit constriction testing of the entire assembly. Hose assemblies with end fittings that do not permit entry of the gauge ( e.g. , restrictive orifice or banjo fitting) are cut 3 inches from the point at which the hose terminates in the end fitting and then tested from the cut end.
(c) Hold the brake hose in a straight position and vertical orientation.
(d) Place the spherical end of the plug gauge just inside the hose or end fitting. If the spherical end will not enter the hose or end fitting using no more force than gravity acting on the plug gauge, this constitutes failure of the constriction test.
(e) Release the plug gauge. Within 3 seconds, the plug gauge shall fall under the force of gravity alone up to the handle of the gauge. If the plug gauge does not fully enter the hose up to the handle of the gauge within three seconds, this constitutes failure of the constriction test.
S6.12.2 Extended plug gauge. (a) The test in 6.12.1 may be conducted with an extended plug gauge to enable testing of the entire brake hose from one end fitting, without cutting the brake hose. The extended plug gauge weight and spherical diameter specifications are as shown in Figure 4, but the handle portion of the gauge may be deleted and the gauge length may be greater than 3 inches.
(b) The required performance of the extended plug gauge in S6.12.1(e) is that after the plug gauge is released, the extended plug gauge shall fall under the force of gravity alone at an average rate of 1 inch per second until the spherical diameter of the extended gauge passes through all portions of the brake hose assembly containing hose. If the extended plug gauge does not pass through all portions of the brake hose assembly containing hose at an average rate of 1 inch per second, this constitutes failure of the constriction test.
View or download PDF S6.12.3 Drop ball test. (a) Utilize a rigid spherical ball with a diameter equal to 64 percent of the nominal inside diameter of the hydraulic brake hose being tested. The weight of the spherical ball shall not exceed 2 ounces (57 grams).
(b) Hold the brake hose in a straight position and vertical orientation.
(c) Hold the ball just above the end fitting.
(d) Release the ball. The ball shall fall under the force of gravity alone completely through all portions of the brake hose assembly containing hose, at an average rate of 1 inch per second. Failure of the ball to pass completely through all portions of the brake hose assembly containing hose, at an average rate of 1 inch per second, constitutes failure of the constriction test.
S7. Requirements—Air brake hose, brake hose assemblies, and brake hose end fittings.
S7.1 Construction. Each air brake hose assembly shall be equipped with permanently attached brake hose end fittings or reusable brake hose end fittings. Each air brake hose constructed of synthetic or natural elastomeric rubber shall conform to the dimensional requirements specified in Table III, except for brake hose manufactured in metric sizes.
S7.2 Labeling
S7.2.1 Hose. Each air brake hose shall be labeled, or cut from bulk hose that is labeled, at intervals of not more than 6 inches, measured from the end of one legend to the beginning of the next, in block capital letters and numerals at least one-eighth of an inch high, with the information listed in paragraphs (a) through (e) of this section. The information need not be present on hose that is sold as part of a brake hose assembly or a motor vehicle.
(a) The symbol DOT, constituting a certification by the hose manufacturer that the hose conforms to all applicable motor vehicle safety standards.
(b) A designation that identifies the manufacturer of the hose, which shall be filed in writing with: Office of Vehicle Safety Compliance, Equipment Division NVS–222, National Highway Traffic Safety Administration, 400 Seventh St. SW., Washington, DC 20590. The designation may consist of block capital letters, numerals, or a symbol.
(c) The month, day, and year, or the month and year, of manufacture, expressed in numerals. For example, 10/1/96 means October 1, 1996.
(d) The nominal inside diameter of the hose expressed in inches or fractions of inches or in millimeters. The abbreviation “mm” shall follow hose sizes that are expressed in millimeters. (Examples:3/8,1/2(1/2SP in the case of1/2inch special air brake hose), 4mm, 6mm.)
(e) The type designation corresponding to the brake hose dimensions in Table III. Type A shall be labeled with the letter “A”, Type AI shall be labeled with the letters “AI”, and type AII shall be labeled with the letters “AII”. Metric air brake hose shall be labeled with the letter “A.”
Table III—Air Brake Hose Dimensions—Inside Diameter (ID) and Outside Diameter (OD) Dimensions in Inches (Millimeters)
| | Type A—Hose Size—Nominal Inside Diameter |
|---|
| 1/4 | 5/16 | 3/8 | 7/16 | 1/2 SP(1) | 5/8 |
|---|
| Min. I.D. | 0.227 (5.8) | 0.289 (7.3) | 0.352 (8.9) | 0.407 (10.3) | 0.469 (11.9) | 0.594 (15.1) |
| Max. I.D. | 0.273 (6.9) | 0.335 (8.5) | 0.398 (10.1) | 0.469 (11.9) | 0.531 (13.5) | 0.656 (16.7) |
| Min. O.D. | 0.594 (15.1) | 0.656 (16.7) | 0.719 (18.3) | 0.781 (19.8) | 0.844 (21.4) | 1.031 (26.2) |
| Max. O.D. | 0.656 (16.7) | 0.719 (18.3) | 0.781 (19.8) | 0.843 (21.4) | 0.906 (23.0) | 1.094 (27.8) |
| | Type AI(2)—Hose Size—Nominal Inside Diameter |
| | 3/16 | 1/4 | 5/16 | 13/32 | 1/2 | 5/8 |
| Min. I.D. | 0.188 (4.8) | 0.250 (6.4) | 0.312 (7.9) | 0.406 (10.3) | 0.500 (12.7) | 0.625 (15.9) |
| Max. I.D. | 0.214 (5.4) | 0.281 (7.1) | 0.343 (8.7) | 0.437 (11.1) | 0.539 (13.7) | 0.667 (16.9) |
| Min. O.D. | 0.472 (12.0) | 0.535 (13.6) | 0.598 (15.1) | 0.714 (18.1) | 0.808 (20.5) | 0.933 (23.7) |
| Max. O.D. | 0.510 (13.0) | 0.573 (14.6) | 0.636 (16.2) | 0.760 (19.3) | 0.854 (21.7) | 0.979 (24.9) |
| | Type AII(2)—Hose Size—Nominal Inside Diameter |
| | 3/16 | 1/4 | 5/16 | 13/32 | 1/2 | 5/8 |
| Min. I.D. | 0.188 (4.8) | 0.250 (6.4) | 0.312 (7.9) | 0.406 (10.3) | 0.500 (12.7) | 0.625 (15.9) |
| Max. I.D. | 0.214 (5.4) | 0.281 (7.1) | 0.343 (8.7) | 0.437 (11.1) | 0.539 (13.7) | 0.667 (16.9) |
| Min. O.D. | 0.500 (12.7) | 0.562 (14.3) | 0.656 (16.7) | 0.742 (18.8) | 0.898 (22.8) | 1.054 (26.8) |
| Max. O.D. | 0.539 (13.7) | 0.602 (15.3) | 0.695 (17.7) | 0.789 (20.1) | 0.945 (24.0) | 1.101 (27.9) |
S7.2.2 End fittings. Except for an end fitting that is attached by deformation of the fitting about a hose by crimping or swaging, at least one component of each air brake hose fitting shall be etched, embossed, or stamped in block capital letters and numerals at least one-sixteenth of an inch high with the following information:
(a) The symbol DOT, constituting a certification by the manufacturer of that component that the component conforms to all applicable motor vehicle safety standards.
(b) A designation that identifies the manufacturer of that component of the fitting, which shall be filed in writing with: Office of Vehicle Safety Compliance, Equipment Division NVS–222, National Highway Traffic Safety Administration, 400 Seventh St. S.W., Washington, DC 20590. The designation may consist of block capital letters, numerals, or a symbol.
(c) The letter “A” shall indicate intended use in air brake systems. In the case of an end fitting intended for use in a reusable assembly with brake hose subject to Table III, “AI” or “AII” shall indicate use with Type I or Type II hose, respectively.
(d) The nominal inside diameter of the hose to which the fitting is properly attached expressed in inches or fractions of inches or in millimeters. (See examples in S7.2.1 (d).) The abbreviation “mm” shall follow hose sizes that are expressed in millimeters.
S7.2.3 Assemblies. Each air brake hose assembly made with end fittings that are attached by crimping or swaging, except those sold as part of a motor vehicle, shall be labeled by means of a band around the brake hose assembly as specified in this paragraph or, at the option of the manufacturer, by means of labeling as specified in S7.2.3.1. The band may at the manufacturer's option be attached so as to move freely along the length of the assembly, as long as it is retained by the end fittings. The band shall be etched, embossed, or stamped in block capital letters, numerals or symbols at least one-eighth of an inch high, with the following information:
(a) The symbol DOT, constituting certification by the hose assembler that the hose assembly conforms to all applicable motor vehicle safety standards.
(b) A designation that identifies the manufacturer of the hose assembly, which shall be filed in writing with: Office of Crash Avoidance Standards, Vehicle Dynamics Division, National Highway Traffic Safety Administration, 400 Seventh Street SW., Washington, DC 20590. The designation may consist of block capital letters, numerals or a symbol.
S7.2.3.1 At least one end fitting of an air brake hose assembly made with end fittings that are attached by crimping or swaging shall be etched, stamped or embossed with a designation at least one-sixteenth of an inch high that identifies the manufacturer of the hose assembly and is filed in accordance with S7.2.3(b).
S7.3 Test requirements. Each air brake hose assembly or appropriate part thereof shall be capable of meeting any of the requirements set forth under this heading, when tested under the conditions of S13 and the applicable procedures of S8. However, a particular hose assembly or appropriate part thereof need not meet further requirements after having met the constriction requirement (S7.3.1) and then having been subjected to any one of the requirements specified in S7.3.2 through S7.3.13.
S7.3.1 Constriction. Every inside diameter of any section of an air brake hose assembly shall not be less than 66 percent of the nominal inside diameter of the brake hose. (S8.14)
S7.3.2 High temperature resistance. An air brake hose shall not show external or internal cracks, charring, or disintegration visible without magnification when straightened after being bent for 70 hours at 212 degrees Fahrenheit (100 degrees Celsius) over a small test cylinder having the radius specified in Table IV for the size of hose tested. (S8.1)
S7.3.3 Low temperature resistance. The inside and outside surfaces of an air brake hose shall not show cracks as a result of conditioning at minus 40 degrees Fahrenheit (minus 40 degrees Celsius) for 70 hours when bent around a large test cylinder having the radius specified in Table IV for the size of hose tested (S8.2).
Table IV—Air Brake Hose Diameters and Test Cylinder Radii
| Nominal hose inside diameter, inches1 | 3/16 | 1/4 | 5/16 | 3/8 | 13/32 | 7/16,
1/2 | 5/8 |
| Nominal hose inside diameter, millimeters1 | 4, 5 | 6 | 8 | | 10 | 12 | 16 |
| Small test cylinder, radius in inches (millimeters)2 | 1 (25) | 1
1/2 (38) | 1
3/4 (45) | 1
3/4 (45) | 1
7/8 (48) | 2 (51) | 2
1/2 (64) |
| Large test cylinder, radius in inches (millimeters)3 | 2 (51) | 2
1/2 (64) | 3 (76) | 3
1/2 (89) | 3
1/2 (89) | 4 (102) | 4
1/2 (114) |
S7.3.4 Oil resistance. After immersion in ASTM No. 3 oil for 70 hours at 212 °F. the volume of a specimen prepared from the inner tube and cover of an air brake hose shall not increase more than 100 percent (S8.3).
S7.3.5 Ozone resistance. An air brake hose assembly shall not show cracks visible under 7-power magnification after exposure to ozone for 70 hours at 104 degrees Fahrenheit (40 degrees Celsius) when bent around a test cylinder of the radius specified in Table IV for the size of hose tested (S8.4).
S7.3.6 Length change. An air brake hose shall not contract in length more than 7 percent nor elongate more than 5 percent when subjected to air pressure of 200 psi (S8.5).
S7.3.7 Adhesion. (a) Except for hose reinforced by wire, an air brake hose shall withstand a tensile force of 8 pounds per inch of length before separation of adjacent layers (S8.6).
(b) An air brake hose reinforced by wire shall permit a steel ball to roll freely along the entire length of the inside of the hose when the hose is subjected to a vacuum of 25 inches of Hg and bent around a test cylinder (S8.13).
S7.3.8 Flex strength and air pressure leakage. An air brake hose assembly of the length specified in the table accompanying Figure 5, when subjected to a flex test and internal pressure cycling, shall be capable of having its internal pressure increased from zero to 140 psi within 2 minutes with pressurized air supplied through an orifice (S8.7).
S7.3.9 Corrosion resistance and burst strength. An air brake hose assembly exposed to salt spray shall not rupture when exposed to hydrostatic pressure of 900 psi (S8.8).
S7.3.10 Tensile strength. An air brake hose assembly designed for use between a frame and axle or between a towed and towing vehicle shall withstand, without separation of the hose from its end fittings, a pull of 250 pounds if it is1/4inch, 6 mm, or less in nominal inside diameter, or a pull of 325 pounds if it is larger than1/4inch or 6 mm in nominal inside diameter. An air brake hose assembly designed for use in any other application shall withstand, without separation of the hose from its end fittings, a pull of 50 pounds if it is1/4inch, 6 mm, or less in nominal inside diameter, 150 pounds if it is larger than1/4inch or 6 mm and equal to or smaller than1/2inch or 12 mm in nominal inside diameter, or 325 pounds if it is larger than1/2inch or 12 mm in nominal inside diameter (S8.9).
S7.3.11 Water absorption and tensile strength. After immersion in distilled water for 70 hours, an air brake hose assembly designed for use between a frame and axle or between a towed and a towing vehicle shall withstand, without separation of the hose from its end fittings, a pull of 250 pounds if it is1/4inch or less or 6 mm or less in nominal inside diameter, or a pull of 325 pounds if it is larger than1/4inch or 6 mm in nominal inside diameter. After immersion in distilled water for 70 hours, an air brake hose assembly designed for use in any other application shall withstand, without separation of the hose from its end fittings, a pull of 50 pounds if it is1/4inch or 6 mm or less in nominal inside diameter, 150 pounds if it is larger than1/4inch or 6 mm and equal to or smaller than1/2inch or 12 mm in nominal inside diameter, or 325 pounds if it is larger than1/2inch or 12 mm in nominal inside diameter. (S8.10)
S7.3.12 Zinc chloride resistance. The outer cover of an air brake hose shall not show cracks visible under 7-power magnification after immersion in a 50 percent zinc chloride aqueous solution for 200 hours (S8.11).
S7.3.13 End fitting corrosion resistance. After 24 hours of exposure to salt spray, air brake hose end fittings shall show no base metal corrosion on the end fitting surface except where crimping or the application of labeling information causes a displacement of the protective coating.
S8. Test procedures—Air brake hose, brake hose assemblies, and brake hose end fittings.
S8.1 High temperature resistance test.
(a) Utilize a small test cylinder with a radius specified in Table IV for the size of hose tested.
(b) Bind the hose around the cylinder and condition it in an air oven for 70 hours at 212 degrees Fahrenheit (100 degrees Celsius).
(c) Cool the hose to room temperature, remove it from the cylinder and straighten it.
(d) Without magnification, examine the hose externally and cut the hose lengthwise and examine the inner tube.
S8.2 Low temperature resistance test. (a) Utilize a large test cylinder with a radius specified in Table IV for the size of hose tested.
(b) Condition the cylinder and the brake hose, in a straight position, in a cold box at minus 40 °F. for 70 hours.
(c) With the hose and cylinder at minus 40 degrees Fahrenheit (minus 40 degrees Celsius), bend the hose 180 degrees around the cylinder at a steady rate in a period of 3 to 5 seconds. Remove the hose from the test cylinder and visibly examine the exterior of the hose for cracks without magnification.
(d) Allow the hose to warm at room temperature for 2 hours. All reusable end fittings are removed from the hose. All permanently-attached end fittings are cut away from the hose. Cut through one wall of the hose longitudinally along its entire length. Unfold the hose to permit examination of the interior surface. Visibly examine the interior of the hose for cracks without magnification.
S8.3 Oil resistance test. Utilize three test specimens and average the results.
S8.3.1 Preparation. Fashion a test specimen by cutting a rectangular block 2 inches long and not less than one-third of an inch in width, having a thickness of not more than one-sixteenth inch, from the brake hose and buff the specimen on both faces to ensure smooth surfaces.
S8.3.2 Measurement. (a) Weigh each specimen to the nearest milligram in air (W1) and in distilled water (W2) at room temperature. If wetting is necessary to remove air bubbles, dip the specimen in acetone and thoroughly rinse it with distilled water.
(b) Immerse each specimen in ASTM IRM 903 oil for 70 hours at 212 degrees Fahrenheit (100 degrees Celsius) and then cool in ASTM IRM 903 oil at room temperature for 30 to 60 minutes.
(c) Dip the specimen quickly in acetone and blot it lightly with filter paper.
(d) Weigh each specimen in a tared weighing bottle (W3) and in distilled water (W4) within five minutes of removal from the cooling liquid.
(e) Calculate the percentage increase in volume follows:
Percent of increase=
[(W3−W4)−(W1−W2)]/(W1−W2)×100
S8.4 Ozone resistance test. Conduct the test specified in S6.8, using air brake hose, except use the large test cylinder specified in Table IV for the size of hose tested.
S8.5 Length change test. (a) Position a test hose in a straight, horizontal position, and apply air pressure of 10 psi thereto.
(b) Measure the hose to determine original free length.
(c) Without releasing the 10 psi, raise the air pressure to the test hose to 200 psi.
(d) Measure the hose under 200 psi to determine final free length. An elongation or contraction is an increase or decrease, respectively, in the final free length from the original free length of the hose.
S8.6 Adhesion test for air brake hose not reinforced by wire.
S8.6.1 Apparatus. A tension testing machine that is power-driven and that applies a constant rate of extension is used for measuring the force required to separate the layers of the test specimen. The apparatus is constructed so that:
(a) The recording head includes a freely rotating form with an outside diameter substantially the same as the inside diameter of the hose specimen to be placed on it.
(b) The freely rotating form is mounted so that its axis of rotation is in the plane of the ply being separated from the specimen and so that the applied force is perpendicular to the tangent of the specimen circumference at the line of separation.
(c) The rate of travel of the power-actuated grip is a uniform one inch per minute and the capacity of the machine is such that maximum applied tension during the test is not more than 85 percent nor less than 15 percent of the machine's rated capacity.
(d) The machine produces a chart with separation as one coordinate and applied tension as the other.
S8.6.2 Preparation. (a) Cut a test specimen of 1 inch or more in length from the hose to be tested and cut the layer to be tested of that test specimen longitudinally along its entire length to the level of contact with the adjacent layer.
(b) Peel the layer to be tested from the adjacent layer to create a flap large enough to permit attachment of the power-actuated clamp of the apparatus.
(c) Mount the test specimen on the freely rotating form with the separated layer attached to the power-actuated clamp.
S8.6.3 [Reserved]
S8.6.4 Calculations. (a) The adhesion value shall be the minimum force recorded on the chart excluding that portion of the chart which corresponds to the initial and final 20 percent portion along the displacement axis.
(b) Express the force in pounds per inch of length.
S8.7 Flex strength and air pressure test.
S8.7.1 Apparatus. A flex testing machine with a fixed hose assembly attachment point and a movable hose assembly attachment point, which meets the dimensional requirements of Figure 5 for the size of hose being tested. The attachment points connect to the end fittings on the hose assembly without leakage and, after the hose assembly has been installed for the flex test, are restrained from rotation. The movable end has a linear travel of 6 inches and a cycle rate of 100 cycles per minute. The machine is capable of increasing the air pressure in the hose assembly from zero to 150 psi within 2 seconds, and decreasing the air pressure in the hose assembly from 150 to zero psi within 2 seconds.
View or download PDFTable Accompanying Figure 5—Dimensions in Inches (Millimeters)
| Free hose length | Nominal hose inside diameter | Dimensions |
|---|
| Position “1” | Position “2” |
|---|
| A | B | C | R(1) | A | B | C | R(1) |
|---|
| 10.00 (254) | 3/16,
1/4 | 3.00 (76) | 2.75 (70) | 3.75 (95) | 1.40 (34) | 3.00 (76) | 2.75 (70) | 3.75 (95) | 1.20 (30) |
| 11.00 (279) | 5/16,
3/8,
13/32 | 3.00 (76) | 3.50 (89) | 4.50 (114) | 1.70 (43) | 3.00 (76) | 3.50 (89) | 4.50 (114) | 1.30 (33) |
| 14.00 (355) | 7/16,
1/2,
5/8 | 3.00 (76) | 4.00 (102) | 5.00 (127) | 2.20 (56) | 3.00 (76) | 4.00 (102) | 5.00 (127) | 1.80 (46) |
S8.7.2 Preparation. (a) Lay the hose material on a flat surface in an unstressed condition. Apply a permanent marking line along the centerline of the hose on the uppermost surface.
(b) Prepare the hose assembly with a free length as shown in the table accompanying Figure 5. The end fittings shall be attached according to the end fitting manufacturer's instructions.
(c) Plug the ends of the hose assembly and conduct the salt spray test in S6.11 using an air brake hose assembly. Remove the plugs from the end fittings.
(d) Within 168 hours of completion of the salt spray test, expose the hose assembly to an air temperature of 212 degrees Fahrenheit (100 degrees Celsius) for 70 hours, with the hose in a straight position. Remove the hose and cool it at room temperature for 2 hours. Within 166 hours, subject the hose to the flexure test in S8.7.2(e).
(e) Install the hose assembly on the flex testing machine as follows. With the movable hose attachment point at the mid point of its travel, attach one end of the hose to the movable attachment point with the marked line on the hose in the uppermost position. Attach the other end of the hose to the fixed attachment point allowing the hose to follow its natural curvature.
(f) Cycle the air pressure in the hose by increasing the pressure in the hose from zero psi to 150 psi and holding constant for one minute, then decreasing the pressure from 150 psi to zero psi and holding constant for one minute. Continue the pressure cycling for the duration of the flex testing. Begin the flex testing by cycling the movable attachment point through 6 inches of travel at a rate of 100 cycles per minute. Stop the flex testing and pressure cycling after one million flex cycles have been completed.
(g) Install an orifice with a hole diameter of 0.0625 inches and a thickness of 0.032 inches in the air pressure supply line to the hose assembly. Provide a gauge or other means to measure air pressure in the hose assembly. Regulate the supply air pressure to the orifice to 150 psi.
(h) Apply 150 psi air pressure to the orifice. After 2 minutes have elapsed, measure the air pressure in the brake hose assembly, while pressurized air continues to be supplied through the orifice.
S8.8 Corrosion resistance and burst strength test. (a) Conduct the test specified in S6.11 using an air brake hose assembly. Remove the plugs from the ends of the hose assembly.
(b) Fill the hose assembly with water, allowing all gases to escape. Apply water pressure at a uniform rate of increase of approximately 1,000 psi per minute until the hose ruptures.
S8.9 Tensile strength test. Utilize a tension testing machine conforming to the requirements of American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) E4–03 “Standard Practices for Force Verification of Testing Machines,” and provided with a recording device to measure the force applied.
(a) Attach an air brake hose assembly to the testing machine to permit straight, even, machine pull on the hose. Use adapters to mount hose assemblies equipped with angled end fittings so that the hose is in a straight position when installed on the machine.
(b) Apply tension at a rate of 1 inch per minute travel of the moving head until separation occurs.
S8.10 Water Absorption and tensile strength test. Immerse an air brake hose assembly in distilled water at room temperature for 70 hours. Thirty minutes after removal from the water, conduct the test specified in S8.9.
S8.11 Zinc chloride resistance test. Immerse an air brake hose in a 50 percent zinc chloride aqueous solution at room temperature for 200 hours. Remove it from the solution and examine it under 7-power magnification for cracks.
S8.12 End fitting corrosion resistance test. Conduct the test specified in S6.11 using an air brake hose assembly.
S8.13 Adhesion test for air brake hose reinforced by wire. (a) Place a steel ball with a diameter equal to 73 percent of the nominal inside diameter of the hose being tested inside of the hose. Plug one end of the hose. Attach the other end of the hose to a source of vacuum.
(b) Subject the hose to a vacuum of 25 inches of Hg for five minutes. With the vacuum still applied to the hose, bend the hose 180 degrees around a large test cylinder with a radius specified in Table IV for the size of hose tested. At the location of this bend, bend the hose 180 degrees around the test cylinder in the opposite direction.
(c) With the vacuum still applied to the hose, return the hose to a straight position. Attempt to roll the ball inside the hose using gravity from one end of the hose to the other end.
S8.14 Constriction test. Perform the constriction test in S6.12 using an air brake hose, except that the spherical diameter “A” of the plug gauge in Figure 4, or the diameter of the rigid spherical ball in S6.12.3(a), shall be 66 percent of the nominal inside diameter of the air brake hose being tested.
S9. Requirements—vacuum brake hose, brake hose assemblies, and brake hose end fittings.
S9.1 Labeling.
S9.1.1 Hose. Each vacuum brake hose shall be labeled, or cut from bulk hose that is labeled, at intervals of not more than 6 inches, measured from the end of one legend to the beginning of the next, in block capital letters and numerals at least one-eighth of an inch high, with the information listed in paragraphs (a) through (e) of this section. The information need not be present on hose that is sold as part of a brake hose assembly or a motor vehicle. (a) The symbol DOT, constituting a certification by the hose manufacturer that the hose conforms to all applicable motor vehicle safety standards.
(b) A designation that identifies the manufacturer of the hose, which shall be filed in writing with: Office of Crash Avoidance Standards, Vehicle Dynamics Division, National Highway Traffic Safety Administration, 400 Seventh Street, SW., Washington, DC 20590. The designation may consist of block capital letters, numerals or a symbol.
(c) The month, day, and year, or the month and year, of manufacture, expressed in numerals. For example, 10/1/96 means October 1, 1996.
(d) The nominal inside diameter of the hose expressed in inches or fractions of inches or in millimeters, or the nominal outside diameter of plastic tubing expressed in inches or fractions of inches or in millimeters followed by the letters OD. The abbreviation “mm” shall follow hose sizes that are expressed in millimeters. (Example of inside diameter:7/32,1/4, 4 mm. Example of outside diameter:1/4OD, 12 mm OD.)
(e) The letters “VL” or “VH” shall indicate that the component is a light-duty vacuum brake hose or heavy-duty vacuum brake hose, respectively.
S9.1.2 End fittings. Except for an end fitting that is attached by heat shrinking or by interference fit with plastic vacuum hose or that is attached by deformation of the fitting about a hose by crimping or swaging, at least one component of each vacuum brake hose fitting shall be etched, embossed, or stamped in block capital letters and numerals at least one-sixteenth of an inch high with the following information:
(a) The symbol DOT, constituting a certification by the manufacturer of that component that the component conforms to all applicable motor vehicle safety standards.
(b) A designation that identifies the manufacturer of that component of the fitting, which shall be filed in writing with: Office of Crash Avoidance Standards, Vehicle Dynamics Division, National Highway Traffic Safety Administration, 400 Seventh Street, SW., Washington, DC 20590. The designation may consist of block capital letters, numerals or a symbol.
(c) The letters “VL” or “VH” shall indicate that the end fitting is intended for use in a light-duty or heavy-duty vacuum brake system, respectively.
(d) The nominal inside diameter of the hose to which the fitting is properly attached expressed in inches or fractions of inches or in millimeters, or the outside diameter of the plastic tubing to which the fitting is properly attached expressed in inches or fraction of inches or in millimeters followed by the letter OD (See examples in S9.1.1(d)). The abbreviation “mm” shall follow hose sizes that are expressed in millimeters.
S9.1.3 Assemblies. Each vacuum brake hose assembly made with end fittings that are attached by crimping or swaging and each plastic tube assembly made with end fittings that are attached by heat shrinking or dimensional interference fit, except those sold as part of a motor vehicle, shall be labeled by means of a band around the brake hose assembly as specified in this paragraph or, at the option of the manufacturer, by means of labeling as specified in S9.1.3.1. The band may at the manufacturer's option be attached so as to move freely along the length of the assembly, as long as it is retained by the end fittings. The band shall be etched, embossed, or stamped in block capital letters, numerals or symbols at least one-eighth of an inch high, with the following information:
(a) The symbol DOT, constituting certification by the hose assembler that the hose assembly conforms to all applicable motor vehicle safety standards.
(b) A designation that identifies the manufacturer of the hose assembly, which shall be filed in writing with: Office of Crash Avoidance Standards, Vehicle Dynamics Division, National Highway Traffic Safety Administration, 400 Seventh Street SW., Washington, DC 20590. The designation may consist of block capital letters, numerals or a symbol.
S9.1.3.1 At least one end fitting of a vacuum brake hose assembly made with end fittings that are attached by crimping or swaging, or of a plastic tubing assembly made with end fittings that are attached by heat shrinking or dimensional interference fit shall be etched, stamped or embossed with a designation at least one-sixteenth of an inch high that identifies the manufacturer of the hose assembly and is filed in accordance with S9.1.3(b).
S9.2 Test requirements. Each vacuum brake hose assembly or appropriate part thereof shall be capable of meeting any of the requirements set forth under this heading, when tested under the conditions of S13 and the applicable procedures of S10. However, a particular hose assembly or appropriate part thereof need not meet further requirements after having met the constriction requirement (S9.2.1) and then having been subjected to any one of the requirements specified in S9.2.2 through S9.2.10.
S9.2.1 Constriction. Except for that part of an end fitting which does not contain hose, every inside diameter of any section of a vacuum brake hose assembly shall not be less than 75 percent of the nominal inside diameter of the hose if for heavy duty, or 70 percent of the nominal inside diameter of the hose if for light duty (S10.11).
S9.2.2 High temperature resistance. A vacuum brake hose tested under the conditions specified in S10.1:
(a) Shall not have collapse of the outside diameter exceeding 10 percent of the initial outside diameter for a heavy-duty vacuum brake hose, or exceeding 15 percent of the initial outside diameter for a light-duty vacuum brake hose;
(b) Shall not show external cracks, charring, or disintegration visible without magnification, and;
(c) Shall not leak when subjected to a hydrostatic pressure test.
S9.2.3 Low temperature resistance. A vacuum brake hose tested under the conditions specified in S10.2 shall:
(a) Not show cracks visible without magnification after conditioning at minus 40 degrees Fahrenheit (minus 40 degrees Celsius) for 70 hours when bent around a cylinder having the radius specified in Table V for the size hose tested; and
(b) Not leak when subjected to a hydrostatic pressure test (S10.1(e)).
S9.2.4 Ozone resistance. A vacuum brake hose shall not show cracks visible under 7-power magnification after exposure to ozone for 70 hours (S10.3).
S9.2.5 Burst strength. A vacuum brake hose shall not rupture under hydrostatic pressure of 350 psi (S10.4).
S9.2.6 Vacuum. The collapse of the outside diameter of a vacuum brake hose under internal vacuum of 26 inches of Hg. for five minutes shall not exceed one-sixteenth of an inch (S10.5).
S9.2.7 Bend. The collapse of the outside diameter of a vacuum brake hose, other than a preformed vacuum brake hose, at the middle point of the test length when bent until the ends touch shall not exceed the values given in Table V for the size of hose tested (S10.6).
Table V—Vacuum Brake Hose Test Requirements
| Hose inside diameter* | High temperature resistance | Low temperature resistance | Bend | Deformation—collapsed inside diameter (dimension D), inches |
|---|
| Inches | Millimeters | Hose length, inches | Radius of cylinder, inches | Hose length, inches | Radius of cylinder, inches | Hose length, inches | Maximum collapse of outside diameter, inches |
|---|
| 7/32 | 5 | 8 | 1
1/2 | 17
1/2 | 3 | 7 | 11/64 | 3/64 |
| 1/4 | 6 | 9 | 1
1/2 | 17
1/2 | 3 | 8 | 3/32 | 1/16 |
| 9/32 | | 9 | 1
3/4 | 19 | 3
1/2 | 9 | 12/64 | 4/64 |
| 11/32 | 8 | 9 | 1
3/4 | 19 | 3
1/2 | 11 | 13/64 | 5/64 |
| 3/8 | 10 | 10 | 1
3/4 | 19 | 3
1/2 | 12 | 5/32 | 3/32 |
| 7/16 | | 11 | 2 | 20
1/2 | 4 | 14 | 17/64 | 5/64 |
| 15/32 | | 11 | 2 | 20
1/2 | 4 | 14 | 17/64 | 5/64 |
| 1/2 | 12 | 11 | 2 | 20
1/2 | 4 | 16 | 7/32 | 1/8 |
| 5/8 | 16 | 12 | 2
1/4 | 22 | 4
1/2 | 22 | 7/32 | 5/32 |
| 3/4 | | 14 | 2
1/2 | 24 | 5 | 28 | 7/32 | 3/16 |
| 1 | | 16 | 3
1/4 | 28
1/2 | 6
1/2 | 36 | 9/32 | 1/4 |
S9.2.8 Swell and adhesion. Following exposure to Reference Fuel B, every inside diameter of any section of a vacuum brake hose shall not be less than 75 percent of the nominal inside diameter of the hose if for heavy duty, or 70 percent of the nominal inside diameter of the hose if for light duty. The vacuum brake hose shall show no leakage in a vacuum test of 26 inches of Hg for 10 minutes. A vacuum hose that is constructed of two or more layers shall withstand a force of 6 pounds per inch of length before separation of adjacent layers. (S10.7).
S9.2.9 Deformation. A vacuum brake hose shall return to 90 percent of its original outside diameter within 60 seconds after five applications of force as specified in S10.8, except that a wire-reinforced hose need only return to 85 percent of its original outside diameter. In the case of a heavy duty hose, the first application of force shall not exceed a peak value of 70 pounds, and the fifth application of force shall reach a peak value of at least 40 pounds. In the case of light duty hose the first application of force shall not exceed a peak value of 50 pounds, and the fifth application of force shall reach a peak value of at least 20 pounds (S10.9).
S9.2.10 End fitting corrosion resistance. After 24 hours of exposure to salt spray, vacuum brake hose end fittings shall show no base metal corrosion of the end fitting surface except where crimping or the application of labeling information has caused displacement of the protective coating. (S10.10).
S10. Test procedures—Vacuum brake hose, brake hose assemblies, and brake hose end fittings.
S10.1 High temperature resistance test. (a) Measure the initial outside diameter of the hose.
(b) Subject the hose to an internal vacuum of 26 inches of Hg at an ambient temperature of 257 degrees Fahrenheit (125 degrees Celsius) for a period of 96 hours. Remove the hose to room temperature and atmospheric pressure.
(c) Within 5 minutes of completion of the conditioning in S10.1(b), measure the outside diameter at the point of greatest collapse and calculate the percentage collapse based on the initial outside diameter.
(d) Cool the hose at room temperature for 5 hours. Bend the hose around a mandrel with a diameter equal to five times the initial outside diameter of the hose. Examine the exterior of the hose for cracks, charring, or disintegration visible without magnification. Remove the hose from the mandrel.
(e) Fill the hose assembly with water, allowing all gases to escape. Apply water pressure in the hose of 175 psi within 10 seconds. Maintain an internal hydrostatic pressure of 175 psi for one minute and examine the hose for visible leakage.
S10.2 Low temperature resistance test. (a) Conduct the test specified in S8.2(a) through (c) using vacuum brake hose with the cylinder radius specified in Table V for the size of hose tested.
(b) Remove the hose from the test cylinder, warm the hose at room temperature for 5 hours, and conduct the hydrostatic pressure test in S10.1(e).
S10.3 Ozone resistance test. Conduct the test specified in S6.8 using vacuum brake hose.
S10.4 Burst strength test. Conduct the test specified in S8.8 using vacuum brake hose.
S10.5 Vacuum test. Utilize a 12-inch vacuum brake hose assembly sealed at one end. (a) Measure the hose outside diameter.
(b) Attach the hose to a source of vacuum and subject it to a vacuum of 26 inches of Hg for 5 minutes.
(c) Measure the hose to determine the minimum outside diameter while the hose is still subject to vacuum.
S10.6 Bend test. (a) Bend a vacuum brake hose, of the length prescribed in Table V, in the direction of its normal curvature until the ends just touch as shown in Figure 6.
(b) Measure the outside diameter of the specimen at point A before and after bending.
(c) The difference between the two measurements is the collapse of the hose outside diameter on bending.
Fig. 6—Bend Test of Vacuum Brake Hose.View or download PDF S10.7 Swell and adhesion test. (a) Fill a specimen of vacuum brake hose 12 inches long with ASTM Reference Fuel B as described in ASTM D471–98ε1 Standard Test Method for Rubber Property—Effect of Liquids. This incorporation by reference was approved by the Director of the Federal Register in accordance with 5 U.S.C. 552(a) and 1 CFR part 51. Copies may be obtained from the American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) International, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, P.O. Box C700, West Conshohocken, PA 19428–2959. Copies may be inspected at the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration, Technical Information Services, 400 Seventh St., SW., Plaza Level, Room 403, Washington, DC 20590, or at the National Archives and Records Administration (NARA). For information on the availability of this material at NARA, call 202–741–6030, or go to: http://www.archives.gov/federal_register/code_of_federal_regulations/ibr_locations.html.
(b) Maintain reference fuel in the hose under atmospheric pressure at room temperature for 48 hours.
(c) Remove fuel and conduct the constriction test in S10.11.
(d) Attach the hose to a source of vacuum and subject it to a vacuum of 26 inches of Hg for 10 minutes. Remove the hose from the vacuum source.
(e) For a vacuum brake hose constructed of two or more layers, conduct the test specified in S8.6 using the vacuum brake hose.
S10.8 [Reserved]
S10.9 Deformation test. Table VI specifies the test specimen dimensions.
S10.9.1 Apparatus. Utilize a compression device, equipped to measure force of at least 100 pounds, and feeler gages of sufficient length to be passed completely through the test specimen.
S10.9.2 Operation. (a) Position the test specimen longitudinally in the compression device with the fabric laps not in the line of the applied pressure.
Table VI—Dimensions of Test Specimen and Feeler Gage For Deformation Test
| Hose inside diameter* | Specimen dimensions (see Fig. 7) | Feeler gage dimensions |
|---|
| in. | mm | Depth (inch) | Length (inch) | Width (inch) | Thickness (inch) |
|---|
| 7/32 | 5 | 3/64 | 1 | 1/8 | 3/64 |
| 1/4 | 6 | 1/16 | 1 | 1/8 | 1/16 |
| 9/32 | | 1/16 | 1 | 1/8 | 1/16 |
| 11/32 | 8 | 5/64 | 1 | 3/16 | 5/64 |
| 3/8 | 10 | 3/32 | 1 | 3/16 | 3/32 |
| 7/16 | | 5/64 | 1 | 1/4 | 5/64 |
| 15/32 | | 5/64 | 1 | 1/4 | 5/64 |
| 1/2 | 12 | 1/8 | 1 | 1/4 | 1/8 |
| 5/8 | 16 | 5/32 | 1 | 1/4 | 5/32 |
| 3/4 | | 3/16 | 1 | 1/4 | 3/16 |
| 1 | | 1/4 | 1 | 1/4 | 1/4 |
(b) Apply gradually increasing force to the test specimen to compress its inside diameter to that specified in Table VI (dimension D of Figure 7) for the size of hose tested.
Fig. 7—Deformed Specimen of Vacuum Brake HoseView or download PDF (c) After 5 seconds release the force and record the peak load applied.
(d) Repeat the procedure four times permitting a 10-second recovery period between load applications.
S10.10 End fitting corrosion resistance test. Conduct the test specified in S6.11 using a vacuum brake hose assembly.
S10.11 Constriction test. Perform the constriction test in S6.12 using a vacuum brake hose, except that the spherical diameter “A” of the plug gauge in Figure 4, or the diameter of the rigid spherical ball in S6.12.3(a), shall be 75 percent of the nominal inside diameter of the vacuum brake hose if it is heavy duty, or 70 percent of the nominal inside diameter of the vacuum brake hose if it is light duty.
S11. Requirements—Plastic air brake tubing, plastic air brake tubing assemblies, and plastic air brake tubing end fittings.
11.1 Construction. Each plastic air brake tubing assembly shall be equipped with permanently attached end fittings or reusable end fittings. Plastic air brake tubing shall conform to the dimensional requirements specified in Table VII. (S12.1)
Table VII—Plastic Air Brake Tubing Dimensions
| Nominal tubing outside diameter | Maximum outside diameter | Minimum outside diameter | Nominal inside diameter | Nominal wall thickness | Wall thickness tolerance |
|---|
| mm | inches | mm | inches | mm | inches | mm | inches | mm | inches |
|---|
| 1/8 inch | 3.25 | 0.128 | 3.10 | 0.122 | 2.01 | 0.079 | 0.58 | 0.023 | 0.08 | 0.003 |
| 5/32 inch | 4.04 | 0.159 | 3.89 | 0.153 | 2.34 | 0.092 | 0.81 | 0.032 | 0.08 | 0.003 |
| 3/16 inch | 4.83 | 0.190 | 4.67 | 0.184 | 2.97 | 0.117 | 0.89 | 0.035 | 0.08 | 0.003 |
| 1/4 inch | 6.43 | 0.253 | 6.27 | 0.247 | 4.32 | 0.170 | 1.02 | 0.040 | 0.08 | 0.003 |
| 5/16 inch | 8.03 | 0.316 | 7.82 | 0.308 | 5.89 | 0.232 | 1.02 | 0.040 | 0.10 | 0.004 |
| 3/8 inch | 9.63 | 0.379 | 9.42 | 0.371 | 6.38 | 0.251 | 1.57 | 0.062 | 0.10 | 0.004 |
| 1/2 inch | 12.83 | 0.505 | 12.57 | 0.495 | 9.55 | 0.376 | 1.57 | 0.062 | 0.10 | 0.004 |
| 5/8 inch | 16.00 | 0.630 | 15.75 | 0.620 | 11.20 | 0.441 | 2.34 | 0.092 | 0.13 | 0.005 |
| 3/4 inch | 19.18 | 0.755 | 18.92 | 0.745 | 14.38 | 0.566 | 2.34 | 0.092 | 0.13 | 0.005 |
| 6 mm | 6.10 | 0.240 | 5.90 | 0.232 | 4.00 | 0.157 | 1.00 | 0.039 | 0.10 | 0.004 |
| 8 mm | 8.10 | 0.319 | 7.90 | 0.311 | 6.00 | 0.236 | 1.00 | 0.039 | 0.10 | 0.004 |
| 10 mm | 10.13 | 0.399 | 9.87 | 0.389 | 7.00 | 0.276 | 1.50 | 0.059 | 0.10 | 0.004 |
| 12 mm | 12.13 | 0.478 | 11.87 | 0.467 | 9.00 | 0.354 | 1.50 | 0.059 | 0.10 | 0.004 |
| 16 mm | 16.13 | 0.635 | 15.87 | 0.625 | 12.00 | 0.472 | 2.00 | 0.079 | 0.13 | 0.005 |
S11.2 Labeling.
S11.2.1 Plastic air brake tubing. Plastic air brake tubing shall be labeled, or cut from bulk tubing that is labeled, at intervals of not more than 6 inches, measured from the end of one legend to the beginning of the next, in block capital letters and numerals at least one-eighth of an inch high, with the information listed in paragraphs (a) through (e) of this section. The information need not be present on tubing that is sold as part of a motor vehicle.
(a) The symbol DOT, constituting a certification by the hose manufacturer that the hose conforms to all applicable motor vehicle safety standards.
(b) A designation that identifies the manufacturer of the tubing, which shall be filed in writing with: Office of Vehicle Safety Compliance, Equipment Division NVS–222, National Highway Traffic Safety Administration, 400 Seventh St. SW., Washington, DC 20590. The designation may consist of block capital letters, numerals, or a symbol.
(c) The month, day, and year, or the month and year, of manufacture, expressed in numerals. For example, 10/1/96 means October 1, 1996.
(d) The nominal outside diameter expressed in inches or fractions of inches or in millimeters followed by the letters OD. The abbreviation “mm” shall follow tubing sizes that are expressed in millimeters. (Examples:3/8OD, 6 mm OD.)
(e) The letter “A” shall indicate intended use in air brake systems.
S11.2.2 End fittings. Except for an end fitting that is attached by deformation of the fitting about the tubing by crimping or swaging, at least one component of each plastic air brake tubing end fitting shall be etched, embossed, or stamped in block capital letters and numerals at least one-sixteenth of an inch high with the following information:
(a) The symbol DOT, constituting a certification by the manufacturer that the end fitting conforms to all applicable motor vehicle safety standards.
(b) A designation that identifies the manufacturer of the end fitting, which shall be filed in writing with: Office of Vehicle Safety Compliance, Equipment Division NVS–222, National Highway Traffic Safety Administration, 400 Seventh St. SW., Washington, DC 20590. The designation may consist of block capital letters, numerals, or a symbol.
(c) The letter “A” shall indicate intended use in air brake systems.
(d) The nominal outside diameter of the plastic tubing to which the fitting is properly attached expressed in inches or fractions of inches or in millimeters followed by the letters OD. The abbreviation “mm” shall follow tubing sizes that are expressed in millimeters. (Examples:3/8OD, 6 mm OD)
S11.2.3. Assemblies. Each plastic air brake tubing assembly made with end fittings that are attached by crimping or swaging, except those sold as part of a motor vehicle, shall be labeled by means of a band around the brake tubing assembly as specified in this paragraph or, at the option of the manufacturer, by means of labeling as specified in S11.2.3.1. The band may at the manufacturer's option be attached so as to move freely along the length of the assembly, as long as it is retained by the end fittings. The band shall be etched, embossed, or stamped in block capital letters, numerals or symbols at least one-eighth of an inch high, with the following information:
(a) The symbol DOT, constituting certification by the tubing assembler that the tubing assembly conforms to all applicable motor vehicle safety standards.
(b) A designation that identifies the manufacturer of the hose assembly, which shall be filed in writing with: Office of Vehicle Safety Compliance, Equipment Division NVS–222, National Highway Traffic Safety Administration, 400 Seventh St. SW., Washington, DC 20590. The designation may consist of block capital letters, numerals, or a symbol.
S11.2.3.1 At least one end fitting of a plastic air brake tubing assembly made with end fittings that are attached by crimping or swaging shall be etched, stamped, or embossed with a designation at least one-sixteenth of an inch high that identifies the manufacturer of the tubing assembly and is filed in accordance with S11.2.3(b).
S11.3 Test requirements. Each plastic air brake tubing assembly or appropriate part thereof shall be capable of meeting any of the requirements set forth under this heading, when tested under the conditions of S13 and the applicable procedures of S12. However, a particular tubing assembly or appropriate part thereof need not meet further requirements after having met the constriction requirement (S11.3.1) and then having been subjected to any one of the requirements specified in S11.3.2 through S11.3.24. Unless otherwise specified, testing is conducted on a sample of tubing 12 inches in length.
S11.3.1 Constriction. Every inside diameter of any section of a plastic air brake tubing assembly shall not be less than 66 percent of the nominal inside diameter of the brake tubing. (S12.2)
S11.3.2 High temperature conditioning and dimensional stability. Plastic air brake tubing shall conform to the dimensions in Table VII after conditioning in air at 230 degrees Fahrenheit (110 degrees Celsius) for four hours. (S12.3)
S11.3.3 Boiling water conditioning and dimensional stability. Plastic air brake tubing shall conform to the dimensions in Table VII after conditioning in boiling water for two hours. (S12.4)
S11.3.4 Burst Strength. Plastic air brake tubing shall not rupture when subjected to the burst strength pressure in Table VIII for the size of tubing being tested. (S12.5)
S11.3.5 Moisture absorption and burst strength. Plastic air brake tubing shall not rupture when subjected to 80 percent of the burst strength pressure in Table VIII, after the tubing has been dried in an oven and then conditioned in a 100 percent relative humidity atmosphere at 75 degrees Fahrenheit (24 degrees Celsius) for 100 hours. (S12.6)
Table VIII—Plastic Air Brake Tubing Mechanical Properties
| Nominal tubing OD | Burst strength pressure | Supported bend radius1 | Unsupported bend radius2 | Conditioned tensile load |
|---|
| kPa | Psi | Mm | inches | mm | inches | N | lbf |
|---|
| 1/8 inch | 6900 | 1000 | 9.4 | 0.37 | 9.4 | 0.37 | 156 | 35 |
| 5/32 inch | 8300 | 1200 | 12.7 | 0.50 | 12.7 | 0.50 | 178 | 40 |
| 3/16 inch | 8300 | 1200 | 19.1 | 0.75 | 19.1 | 0.75 | 222 | 50 |
| 1/4 inch | 8300 | 1200 | 25.4 | 1.00 | 25.4 | 1.00 | 222 | 50 |
| 5/16 inch | 6900 | 1000 | 31.8 | 1.25 | 38.1 | 1.50 | 334 | 75 |
| 3/8 inch | 9700 | 1400 | 38.1 | 1.50 | 38.1 | 1.50 | 667 | 150 |
| 1/2 inch | 6600 | 950 | 50.8 | 2.00 | 63.5 | 2.50 | 890 | 200 |
| 5/8 inch | 6200 | 900 | 63.5 | 2.50 | 76.2 | 3.00 | 1446 | 325 |
| 3/4 inch | 5500 | 800 | 76.2 | 3.00 | 88.9 | 3.50 | 1557 | 350 |
| 6 mm | 7600 | 1100 | 20.0 | 0.75 | 25.4 | 1.00 | 222 | 50 |
| 8 mm | 6200 | 900 | 31.8 | 1.25 | 38.1 | 1.50 | 334 | 75 |
| 10 mm | 8200 | 1200 | 38.1 | 1.50 | 38.1 | 1.50 | 667 | 150 |
| 12 mm | 6900 | 1000 | 44.5 | 1.75 | 63.5 | 2.50 | 890 | 200 |
| 16 mm | 6000 | 875 | 69.9 | 2.75 | 76.2 | 3.00 | 1446 | 325 |
S11.3.6 Ultraviolet light resistance. Plastic air brake tubing shall not rupture when subjected to 80 percent of the burst strength pressure in Table VIII for the size of tubing being tested, after being exposed to ultraviolet light for 300 hours and then impacted with a one pound weight dropped from a height of 12 inches. (S12.7)
S11.3.7 Low temperature flexibility. The outer surface of plastic air brake tubing shall not show cracks visible without magnification as a result of conditioning in air at 230 degrees Fahrenheit (110 degrees Celsius) for 24 hours, and then conditioning in air at minus 40 degrees Fahrenheit (minus 40 degrees Celsius) for four hours, and then bending the tubing 180 degrees around a test cylinder having a radius equal to six times the nominal outside diameter of the tubing. (S12.8)
S11.3.8 High temperature flexibility. Plastic air brake tubing shall not rupture or burst when subjected to 80 percent of the burst strength pressure in Table VIII for the size of tubing being tested, after the tubing has been:
(a) Conditioned in air at 230 degrees Fahrenheit (110 degrees Celsius) for 72 hours while bent 180 degrees around a cylinder having a radius equal to the supported bend radius in Table VIII for the size of tubing being tested; and
(b) Cooled to room temperature while remaining on the cylinder, then straightened; and
(c) Bent 180 degrees around the cylinder in the opposite direction of the first bending. (S12.9)
S11.3.9 High temperature resistance. Plastic air brake tubing shall not rupture or burst when subjected to 80 percent of the burst strength pressure in Table VIII for the size of tubing being tested, after the tubing has been conditioned in air at 230 degrees Fahrenheit (110 degrees Celsius) for 72 hours. (S12.10)
S11.3.10 High temperature conditioning, low temperature impact resistance. Plastic air brake tubing shall not rupture or burst when subjected to 80 percent of the burst strength pressure in Table VIII for the size of tubing being tested, after the tubing has been conditioned in air at 230 degrees Fahrenheit (110 degrees Celsius) for 24 hours, then conditioned in air at minus 40 degrees Fahrenheit (minus 40 degrees Celsius) for 4 hours and impacted with a one pound weight dropped from a height of 12 inches. (S12.11)
S11.3.11 Boiling water conditioning, low temperature impact resistance. Plastic air brake tubing shall not rupture when subjected to 80 percent of the burst strength pressure in Table VIII for the size of tubing being tested, after the tubing has been conditioned in boiling water for two hours, then conditioned in air at minus 40 degrees Fahrenheit (minus 40 degrees Celsius) for 4 hours, and then impacted with a one pound weight dropped from a height of 12 inches. (S12.12)
S11.3.12 Zinc chloride resistance. The outer surface of plastic air brake tubing shall not show cracks visible under 7-power magnification after immersion in a 50 percent zinc chloride aqueous solution for 200 hours while bent around a cylinder having a radius equal to the supported bend radius in Table VIII for the size of tubing tested. (S12.13)
S11.3.13 Methyl alcohol resistance. The outer surface of plastic air brake tubing shall not show cracks visible under 7-power magnification after immersion in a 95 percent methyl alcohol aqueous solution for 200 hours while bent around a cylinder having a radius equal to the supported bend radius in Table VIII for the size of tubing tested. (S12.14)
S11.3.14 High temperature conditioning and collapse resistance. The collapse of the outside diameter of plastic air brake tubing shall not exceed twenty percent of the original outside diameter when bent 180 degrees on a holding fixture to the unsupported bend radius specified in Table VIII and conditioned in air at 200 degrees Fahrenheit (93 degrees Celsius) for 24 hours. (S12.15)
S11.3.15 Ozone resistance. The outer surface of plastic air brake tubing shall not show cracks visible under 7-power magnification after exposure to ozone for 70 hours at 104 degrees Fahrenheit (40 degrees Celsius). (S12.16)
S11.3.16 Oil resistance. Plastic air brake tubing shall not rupture when subjected to 80 percent of the burst strength pressure in Table VIII for the size of tubing being tested, after the tubing has been conditioned in ASTM IRM 903 oil at 212 degrees Fahrenheit (100 degrees Celsius) for 70 hours. (S12.17)
S11.3.17 Tensile strength. A plastic air brake tubing assembly designed for use between frame and axle or between a towed and a towing vehicle shall withstand, without separation of the tubing from its end fittings, a pull of 250 pounds if it is3/8inch, 10 mm, or less in nominal outside diameter, or a pull of 325 pounds if it is larger than3/8inch or 10 mm in nominal outside diameter. A plastic air brake tubing assembly designed for use in any other application shall withstand, without separation of the hose from its end fittings, a pull of 35 pounds if it is1/8inch, 3 mm, or less in nominal outside diameter, 40 pounds if it is5/32inch or 4 mm in nominal outside diameter, 50 pounds if it is3/16to3/8inch or 5 mm to 10 mm in nominal outside diameter, 150 pounds if it is1/2to5/8inch or 11 mm to 16 mm in nominal outside diameter, or 325 pounds if it is larger than5/8inch or 16 mm in nominal outside diameter. (S12.18)
S11.3.18 Boiling water conditioning and tensile strength. A plastic air brake tubing assembly when subjected to a tensile pull test shall either elongate 50 percent or withstand the conditioned tensile load in Table VIII without separation from its end fittings, with one end of the assembly conditioned in boiling water for 5 minutes. (S12.19)
S11.3.19 Thermal conditioning and tensile strength. A plastic air brake tubing assembly when subjected to a tensile pull test shall either elongate 50 percent or withstand the conditioned tensile load in Table VIII without separation from its end fittings after the assembly has been subjected to four cycles of conditioning in air at minus 40 degrees Fahrenheit (minus 40 degrees Celsius) for thirty minutes, normalizing at room temperature, conditioning in boiling water for 15 minutes, and normalizing at room temperature. (S12.20)
S11.3.20 Vibration resistance. A plastic air brake tubing assembly with an internal air pressure of 120 psig shall not rupture or leak more than 50 cm3 per minute at a temperature of minus 40 degrees Fahrenheit (minus 40 degrees Celsius) and 25 cm3 per minute at a temperature of 75 degrees Fahrenheit (24 degrees Celsius), after the assembly has been subjected to 1,000,000 cycles of vibration testing with one end of the assembly fixed and the other end stroked1/2-inch at 600 cycles per minute. In addition, end fittings that use a threaded retention nut shall retain at least 20 percent of the original retention nut tightening torque upon completion of the vibration testing. The vibration test shall be conducted in an environmental chamber and the air temperature shall be cycled between minus 40 degrees Fahrenheit (minus 40 degrees Celsius) and 220 degrees Fahrenheit (104 degrees Celsius) during the test. (S12.21)
S11.3.21 End fitting retention. The end fittings of a plastic air brake tubing assembly shall not rupture when the assembly is filled with water and pressurized to the burst strength pressure in Table VIII. (S12.22)
S11.3.22 Thermal conditioning and end fitting retention. The end fittings of a plastic air brake tubing assembly shall not rupture when the tubing assembly is filled with ASTM IRM 903 oil and:
(a) Conditioning in air at 200 degrees Fahrenheit (93 degrees Celsius) for 24 hours with atmospheric pressure inside the tubing assembly; and
(b) Increasing the pressure inside the tubing assembly to 450 psi, and holding this pressure for five minutes while maintaining an air temperature of 200 degrees Fahrenheit (93 degrees Celsius); and
(c) Reducing the pressure inside the tubing assembly to atmospheric and permitting the tubing assembly to cool at 75 degrees Fahrenheit (24 degrees Celsius) for 1 hour; and
(d) Conditioning the tubing assembly in air at minus 40 degrees Fahrenheit (minus 40 degrees Celsius) for 24 hours with atmospheric pressure inside the tubing assembly; and
(e) Increasing the pressure inside the tubing assembly to 450 psi, and holding this pressure for five minutes while maintaining an air temperature of minus 40 degrees Fahrenheit (minus 40 degrees Celsius). (S12.23)
S11.3.23 End fitting serviceability. A plastic air brake end fitting that uses a threaded retention nut shall not rupture or leak more than 25 cm3 per minute when pressurized to 120 psi after five assembly cycles. (S12.24)
S11.3.24 End fitting corrosion resistance. After 24 hours of exposure to salt spray, air brake hose end fittings shall show no base metal corrosion on the end fitting surface except where crimping or the application of labeling information causes a displacement of the protective coating. (S12.25)
S12. Test procedures—Plastic air brake tubing, plastic air brake tubing assemblies, plastic air brake tubing end fittings.
S12.1 Air brake tubing dimensions. Measure the tubing dimensions including wall thickness, inside diameter, and outside diameter, using appropriate metrology apparatus such as micrometers, dial indicators and gauges, or optical comparators. To account for slight out-of-round conditions, diameter measurements may be calculated using the average of the major and minor diameters.
S12.2 Constriction test. Perform the constriction test in S6.12 using an air brake tubing assembly, except that the spherical diameter “A” of the plug gauge in Figure 4, or the diameter of the rigid spherical ball in S6.12.3(a), shall be 66 percent of the nominal inside diameter of the tubing as specified in Table VII.
S12.3 High temperature conditioning and dimensional stability test. (a) Condition the tubing at 230 degrees Fahrenheit (110 degrees Celsius) for 4 hours in an air oven.
(b) Remove the tubing from the oven and allow to cool at room temperature for 30 minutes.
(c) Measure the dimensions of the tubing using the procedure in S12.1.
S12.4 Boiling water conditioning and dimensional stability test. (a) Utilize a container constructed of a non-reactive material large enough so that the tubing to be tested does not touch any surface of the container. Fill container with distilled water.
(b) Slip the tubing over a stainless steel wire for positioning it in the pot.
(c) Bring the water to a boil. Place the tubing in the water and position it so that it does not touch the container. Boil the tubing for two hours. Replenish the water as necessary, adding it slowly so that the water in the pot boils continuously.
(d) Remove the tubing from the water and allow to cool at room temperature for 30 minutes. Wipe off any water that remains on the tubing.
(e) Measure the dimensions of the tubing using the procedure in S12.1.
S12.5 Burst strength test. (a) Utilize an air brake tubing assembly or prepare a 12 inch length of tubing and install end fittings according to the end fitting manufacturer's instructions.
(b) Plug one end of the assembly, fill it with water, and connect the other end to a source of water pressure. Bleed any air from the assembly and water pressure system.
(c) Increase the water pressure inside the tubing assembly at a rate of 3,000 psi per minute to the burst strength pressure for the size of tubing being tested as specified in Table VIII.
S12.6 Moisture absorption and burst strength. (a) Prepare a sample of tubing twelve inches in length.
(b) Condition the tubing at 230 degrees Fahrenheit (110 degrees Celsius) for 24 hours in an air oven. Remove the tubing from the oven and within 30 seconds, and weigh it to establish the initial weight. The weight shall be measured with a resolution of 0.01 gram; if the scale has a higher resolution, then values of 0.005 gram and above shall be rounded to the nearest 0.01 gram and values below 0.005 gram shall be truncated.
(c) Place the tubing in an environmental chamber and condition it for 100 hours at 100 percent relative humidity and a temperature of 75 degrees Fahrenheit (24 degrees Celsius).
(d) Remove the tubing from the chamber and within a period of 5 minutes, remove all surface moisture from the tubing using cloth and weigh the tubing to establish the conditioned weight. Weight shall be measured to the nearest 0.01 gram as in S12.6(b).
(e) Calculate percentage of moisture absorption as follows:
([Conditioned Weight—Initial Weight] ÷ [Initial Weight]) × 100
(f) Install end fittings according to the end fitting manufacturers instructions.
(g) Conduct the burst strength test in S12.5 except use 80 percent of the burst strength pressure for the size of tubing being tested as specified in Table VIII.
S12.7 Ultraviolet light resistance test. (a) Apparatus. An accelerated weathering test machine for ultraviolet light conditioning of plastic air brake tubing. The machine shall be equipped with fluorescent UVA–340 light bulbs and automatic irradiance control. Also utilize an impact test apparatus as shown in Figure 8.
(b) Test standards. The testing is in accordance with American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) G154–00 “Standard Practice for Operating Fluorescent Light Apparatus for UV Exposure of Nonmetallic Materials;” ASTM G151–97 “Standard Practice for Exposing Nonmetallic Materials in Accelerated Test Devices that Use Laboratory Light Sources,” and; ASTM D4329–99 “Standard Practice for Fluorescent UV Exposure of Plastics.” These incorporations by reference were approved by the Director of the Federal Register in accordance with 5 U.S.C. 552(a) and 1 CFR Part 51. Copies may be obtained from the American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) International, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, P.O. Box C700, West Conshohocken, PA 19428–2959. Copies may be inspected at the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration, Technical Information Services, 400 Seventh St., SW., Plaza Level, Room 403, Washington, DC 20590, or at the National Archives and Records Administration (NARA). For information on the availability of this material at NARA, call (202) 741–6030, or go to: http://www.archives.gov/federal_register/code_of_federal_regulations/ibr_locations.html .
(c) Preparation. (1) Utilize a 12 inch length of plastic air brake tubing. Mask 1 inch of each end of the tubing where end fittings will be attached using opaque tape.
(2) Attach the tubing to the test rack of the machine, securing it at the ends along the masked sections. Wipe the outside surface of the tubing with acetone to remove any surface contaminants. Place the tubing and rack in the accelerated weathering test machine so that the center of the tubing assembly is approximately in the center of the UV light exposure area of the test machine. (If multiple plastic brake tubing assemblies are tested, then their position in the machine should be rotated according to ASTM D4329–99 S7.4.1, except the rotation shall be each 96 hours instead of weekly.) The distance from the light bulb to the tubing shall be approximately 2 inches. Set the UV irradiance to 0.85 watts per square meter at 340 nm and maintain this level during the testing. Maintain a temperature inside the test chamber of 113 degrees Fahrenheit (45 degrees Celsius), and use only atmospheric humidity. Expose the tubing at this UV irradiance level for 300 hours continuously. Remove the tubing from the test chamber.
(3) Place the tubing inside the impact test apparatus, and drop the impacter onto the tubing from a height of 12 inches.
(4) Remove the masking material from the ends of the tubing. Install end fittings according to the end fitting manufacturer's instructions. Conduct the burst strength test in S12.5 except use 80 percent of the burst strength pressure for the size of tubing being tested as specified in Table VIII.
View or download PDFTable Accompanying Figure 8
| Nominal tubing outside diameter | Hole diameter “D” |
|---|
| mm | Inches |
|---|
| 1/8 inch | 3.96 | 0.156 |
| 5/32 inch | 4.75 | 0.187 |
| 3/16 inch | 5.54 | 0.218 |
| 1/4 inch | 7.14 | 0.281 |
| 5/16 inch | 8.71 | 0.343 |
| 3/8 inch | 10.31 | 0.406 |
| 1/2 inch | 13.49 | 0.531 |
| 5/8 inch | 16.66 | 0.656 |
| 3/4 inch | 20.32 | 0.800 |
| 6 mm | 6.80 | 0.268 |
| 8 mm | 8.80 | 0.346 |
| 10 mm | 10.80 | 0.425 |
| 12 mm | 12.80 | 0.504 |
| 16 mm | 16.80 | 0.661 |
S12.8 Low temperature flexibility test. (a) Utilize a cylinder having a radius of six times the nominal outside diameter of the tubing.
(b) Condition the tubing in an air oven at 230 degrees Fahrenheit (110 degrees Celsius) for 24 hours. Remove from the oven and cool at room temperature for 30 minutes.
(c) Condition the cylinder and the tubing in an environmental chamber at minus 40 degrees Fahrenheit (minus 40 degrees Celsius) for four hours.
(d) With the tubing and test cylinder at minus 40 degrees Fahrenheit (minus 40 degrees Celsius), bend the tubing 180 degrees around the cylinder at a steady rate in a period of 4 to 8 seconds.
S12.9 High temperature flexibility test. (a) Utilize a cylinder having a radius equal to the supported bend radius in Table VIII for the size of tubing being tested.
(b) Bend the tubing 180 degrees around the cylinder and hold in place with a clamp or other suitable support, applying only enough force on the tubing to hold it in position.
(c) Condition the tubing and cylinder in an air oven at 230 degrees Fahrenheit (110 degrees Celsius) for 72 hours. Remove the tubing and cylinder from the oven and cool at room temperature for two hours.
(d) Remove the clamps or supports from the tubing and straighten the tubing at a steady rate in a period of 4 to 8 seconds.
(e) Rebend the tubing 180 degrees around the cylinder, at the same point but in the opposite direction of the bending in S12.9(b), at a steady rate in a period of 4 to 8 seconds.
(f) Conduct the burst strength test in S12.5 except use 80 percent of the burst strength pressure for the size of tubing being tested as specified in Table VIII.
S12.10 High temperature resistance test. Condition the tubing in an air oven at 230 degrees Fahrenheit (110 degrees Celsius) for 72 hours. Remove the tubing and allow to cool at room temperature for 30 minutes. Conduct the burst strength test in S12.5 except use 80 percent of the burst strength pressure for the size of tubing being tested as specified in Table VIII.
S12.11 High temperature conditioning, low temperature impact resistance test. (a) Apparatus. Utilize an impact test apparatus as shown in Figure 8.
(b) Condition the tubing in an air oven at 230 degrees Fahrenheit (110 degrees Celsius) for 72 hours. Remove the tubing and allow to cool at room temperature for 30 minutes.
(c) Condition the tubing and the impact test apparatus in an environmental chamber at minus 40 degrees Fahrenheit (minus 40 degrees Celsius) for 4 hours.
(d) With the tubing and impact test apparatus at minus 40 degrees Fahrenheit (minus 40 degrees Celsius), place the tubing inside the apparatus and drop the impacter onto the tubing from a height of 12 inches. Remove the tubing from the chamber and allow to warm at room temperature for one hour.
(e) Conduct the burst strength test in S12.5 except use 80 percent of the burst strength pressure for the size of tubing being tested as specified in Table VIII.
S12.12 Boiling water conditioning, low temperature impact resistance test. (a) Apparatus. Utilize an impact test apparatus as shown in Figure 8.
(b) Condition the tubing in boiling water using the test in S12.4 (a) through (d), except that the length of tubing shall be 12 inches.
(c) Condition the tubing and the impact test apparatus in an environmental chamber at minus 40 degrees Fahrenheit (minus 40 degrees Celsius) for 4 hours.
(d) With the tubing and impact test apparatus at minus 40 degrees Fahrenheit (minus 40 degrees Celsius), place the tubing inside the apparatus and drop the impacter onto the tubing from a height of 12 inches. Remove the tubing from the chamber and allow to warm at room temperature for one hour.
(e) Conduct the burst strength test in S12.5 except use 80 percent of the burst strength pressure for the size of tubing being tested as specified in Table VIII.
S12.13 Zinc chloride resistance test. (a) Utilize a cylinder having a radius equal to the supported bend radius in Table VIII for the size of tubing being tested. The cylinder is constructed of a non-reactive material or coated to prevent chemical reaction with zinc chloride. The length of the tubing sample is long enough so that its ends will not be submerged during the immersion in zinc chloride, or the ends of the tubing are plugged to keep the zinc chloride from entering the tubing.
(b) Bend the tubing 180 degrees around the cylinder and hold in place with a clamp or other suitable support constructed of non-reactive materials, applying only enough force on the tubing to hold it in position.
(c) Immerse the tubing and cylinder in a 50 percent zinc chloride aqueous solution at room temperature for 200 hours.
(d) Remove the tubing and cylinder from the solution. While still on the test cylinder, inspect the tubing under 7-power magnification for cracks.
S12.14 Methyl alcohol resistance. (a) Utilize a cylinder having a radius equal to the supported bend radius in Table VIII for the size of tubing being tested. The cylinder is constructed of a non-reactive material or coated to prevent chemical reaction with methyl alcohol.
(b) Bend the tubing 180 degrees around the cylinder and hold in place with a clamp or other suitable support constructed of non-reactive materials, applying only enough force on the tubing to hold it in position. The ends of the tubing may be shortened so that they will be fully submerged in the methyl alcohol.
(c) Immerse the tubing and cylinder in a 95 percent methyl alcohol aqueous solution at room temperature for 200 hours.
(d) Remove the tubing and cylinder from the solution. While still on the test cylinder, inspect the tubing under 7-power magnification for cracks.
S12.15 High temperature conditioning and collapse resistance test. (a) Apparatus. A holding device consisting of two vertical pins affixed to a flat, horizontal plate. Each pin projects 1 inch above the top surface of the plate. The diameter of each pin is approximately equal to the inside diameter of the tubing being tested. Using the unsupported bend radius for the size of tubing being tested from Table VIII, the distance between the pin centerlines is equal to:
[2 × unsupported bend radius] + [nominal OD of tubing]
(b) Preparation. (1) Use the unsupported bend radius for the size of tubing being tested from Table VIII and cut the tubing to the following length:
[3.14 × [unsupported bend radius]] + [10 × [nominal tubing OD]] + 2 inches
or
[3.14 × [unsupported bend radius]] + [10 × [nominal tubing OD]] + 50 mm
(2) Place a reference mark at the center of the sample. At this mark, measure the initial outside diameter of the tubing. If the tubing is slightly out-of-round, use the elliptical minor diameter as the initial outside diameter.
(3) Install the tubing completely over the pins of the holding device so that the tubing is bent 180 degrees. If the tubing has a natural curvature, the tubing shall be bent in the direction of the natural curvature.
(4) Condition the holding device and tubing in an air oven at 200 degrees Fahrenheit (93 degrees Celsius) for 24 hours. Remove the holding device and tubing and allow to cool at room temperature for thirty minutes.
(5) With the tubing still mounted to the holding device, measure the elliptical minor diameter of the tubing at the reference mark to determine the final outside diameter.
(c) Calculation. Calculate the percentage collapse of the outside diameter of the tubing as follows: ([Initial Outside Diameter—Final Outside Diameter] ÷ [Initial Outside Diameter]) × 100
S12.16 Ozone resistance test. Conduct the test specified in S6.8 using plastic air brake tubing.
S12.17 Oil resistance test. (a) Utilize a plastic air brake tubing assembly or prepare a 12 inch length of tubing and install end fittings according to the end fitting manufacturer's instructions.
(b) Immerse the tubing in ASTM IRM 903 oil at 212 degrees Fahrenheit (100 degrees Celsius) for 70 hours. Remove and allow to cool at room temperature for 30 minutes. Wipe any excess oil from the tubing assembly.
(c) Conduct the burst strength test in S12.5 except use 80 percent of the burst strength pressure for the size of tubing being tested as specified in Table VIII and, at the manufacturer's option, oil may be used as the test medium instead of water.
S12.18 Tensile strength test. Conduct the test in S8.9 using a plastic air brake tubing assembly or an assembly prepared from a 12 inch length of air brake tubing with end fittings installed according to the end fitting manufacturer's instructions.
S12.19 Boiling water conditioning and tensile strength. (a) Apparatus. Use a tension testing machine as specified in S8.9. The lower attachment point of the machine is equipped with a heated, open-top container that is water tight. The inside of the container (lower attachment point) and upper attachment point of the machine have provisions to quickly attach a brake hose assembly for tensile testing.
(b) Preparation. Prepare an air brake tubing assembly with a free length of 6 inches (six inches of exposed tubing between the end fittings), with the end fittings installed in accordance with the end fitting manufacturer's instructions. If necessary install adapters on the end fittings to permit quick attachment to the machine, to keep water from entering the tubing assembly, and to ensure that the tubing assembly is in a straight position when installed on the machine. Fill the container with distilled water such that the lower 4 inches of exposed tubing will be submerged when the brake tubing assembly is installed on the machine. Heat the water until it boils. Then quickly install the plastic air brake tubing assembly on the machine with the lower end of the tubing assembly in the boiling water. After the water has boiled continuously for 5 minutes, apply tension to the tubing assembly at a rate of 1 inch per minute travel of the moving head until either the conditioned tensile load in Table VIII for the size of tubing being tested is reached or the free length of the tubing assembly reaches 9 inches, whichever occurs first.
S12.20 Thermal conditioning and tensile strength. (a) Apparatus. Use a tension testing machine as specified in S8.9.
(b) Preparation. Prepare an air brake tubing assembly with a free length of 6 inches (six inches of exposed tubing between the end fittings), with the end fittings installed in accordance with the end fitting manufacturer's instructions. If necessary install adapters on the end fittings to permit attachment to the machine, to keep water from entering the tubing assembly, and/or to ensure that the tubing assembly is in a straight position when installed on the machine. Subject the tubing assembly to four complete cycles of the following sequence:
(1) Condition the tubing assembly in an environmental chamber at minus 40 degrees Fahrenheit (minus 40 degrees Celsius) for 30 minutes. Remove from the chamber and allow to warm at room temperature for 30 minutes.
(2) Condition the tubing assembly by submerging it in boiling water for 15 minutes. Remove and allow to cool at room temperature for 30 minutes. Install the tubing assembly on the tension testing machine and apply tension to the tubing assembly at a rate of one inch per minute travel of the moving head until either the conditioned tensile load in Table VIII for the size of tubing being tested is reached or the free length of the tubing assembly reaches 9 inches, whichever occurs first.
S12.21 Vibration resistance test. (a) Apparatus. A vibration testing machine that supports a brake tubing assembly by its end fittings in approximately a straight line and includes the following features:
(1) One tubing assembly attachment point is fixed and the other moves in a plane perpendicular to a line projected between the attachment points. The movable attachment point moves in a linear direction and travels1/2inch total and at its midpoint of travel falls on a line projected between the attachment points. The movable attachment point has a cycle rate of 600 cycles per minute.
(2) The distance between the attachment points is adjustable to compensate for varying lengths of brake tubing assemblies.
(3) The actuating mechanism for the movable attachment point is balanced to prevent introduction of machine vibration into the brake tubing assembly.
(4) The machine has a compressed air supply system that pressurizes the air brake tubing assembly through one fitting while the other fitting is plugged. The machine's compressed air supply system includes a pressure gauge or monitoring system and an air flow meter.
(5) The machine is constructed so that an air brake tubing assembly mounted on it can be conditioned in an environmental test chamber.
(b) Preparation. (1) Prepare an air brake tubing assembly with a free length of 18 inches (18 inches of exposed tubing between the end fittings), with the end fittings installed in accordance with the end fitting manufacturer's instructions. Record the initial tightening torque for an end fitting that uses a threaded retaining nut.
(2) Install the air brake tubing assembly on the vibration testing machine and, with the movable attachment point at the midpoint of its travel, adjust the distance between the attachment points so that they are1/2inch closer together than the distance at which the tubing assembly is taut.
(3) With the tubing assembly inside the environmental chamber, apply compressed air to the tubing assembly at a regulated pressure of 120 psi and maintain the supply of air to the tubing assembly for the duration of the test. Set the temperature of the environmental chamber to 220 degrees Fahrenheit (104 degrees Celsius) and initiate cycling of the movable attachment point. After 250,000 cycles, set the temperature of the environmental chamber to minus 40 degrees Fahrenheit (minus 40 degrees Celsius). After 500,000 cycles, set the temperature of the environmental chamber to 220 degrees Fahrenheit (104 degrees Celsius). After 750,000 cycles, set the temperature of the environmental chamber to minus 40 degrees Fahrenheit (minus 40 degrees Celsius). Measure the air flow rate just prior to 1,000,000 cycles and if the compressed air flow rate supplied to the air brake tubing assembly exceeds 50 cubic centimeters per minute this constitutes failure of the test. Stop the cycling at 1,000,000 cycles and set the environmental chamber temperature to 75 degrees Fahrenheit (24 degrees Celsius), while air pressure is still supplied to the air brake tubing assembly. After one hour, measure the compressed air flow rate supplied to the air brake tubing assembly and if the rate exceeds 25 cubic centimeters per minute this constitutes failure of the test.
(4) For end fittings that use a threaded retaining nut, apply 20 percent of the original tightening torque as recorded in S12.21(b)(1). If the retention nut visibly moves, this constitutes a failure of the test.
S12.22 End fitting retention test. (a) Utilize an air brake tubing assembly or prepare a 12 inch length of tubing and install end fittings according to the end fitting manufacturer's instructions.
(b) Plug one end of the assembly, fill it with water, and connect the other end to a source of water pressure. Bleed any air from the assembly and water pressure system.
(c) Increase the pressure inside the tubing assembly at a rate of 3,000 psi per minute to 50 percent of the burst strength pressure for the size of tubing being tested as specified in Table VIII. Hold the pressure constant for 30 seconds.
(d) Increase the pressure inside the tubing assembly at a rate of 3,000 psi per minute to the burst strength pressure for the size of tubing being tested as specified in Table VIII.
S12.23 Thermal conditioning and end fitting retention test. (a) Apparatus. A source of hydraulic pressure that includes a pressure gauge or monitoring system, uses ASTM IRM 903 oil, and is constructed so that an air brake tubing assembly mounted to it can be conditioned in an environmental test chamber.
(b) Preparation. Utilize an air brake tubing assembly or prepare a 12 inch length of tubing and install end fittings according to the end fitting manufacturer's instructions. Attach one end of the assembly to the hydraulic pressure supply and plug the other end of the assembly, fill the assembly with ASTM IRM 903 oil and bleed any air from the assembly, and place the tubing assembly inside an environmental chamber. Conduct the following tests:
(1) With atmospheric pressure applied to the oil inside the tubing assembly, set the environmental chamber temperature to 200 degrees Fahrenheit (93 degrees Celsius) and condition the tubing assembly for 24 hours.
(2) With the temperature maintained at 200 degrees Fahrenheit (93 degrees Celsius), increase the oil pressure inside the tubing assembly at a rate of 3,000 psi per minute to 450 psi, and hold this pressure for 5 minutes.
(3) Decrease the oil pressure inside the tubing assembly at a rate of 3,000 psi per minute to atmospheric pressure and set the temperature of the environmental chamber to 75 degrees Fahrenheit (24 degrees Celsius). Condition the tubing assembly at this temperature for 1 hour.
(4) Set the temperature of the environmental chamber to minus 40 degrees Fahrenheit (minus 40 degrees Celsius) and condition the tubing assembly for 24 hours.
(5) With the temperature maintained at minus 40 degrees Fahrenheit (minus 40 degrees Celsius), increase the hydraulic pressure inside the tubing assembly at a rate of 3,000 psi per minute to 450 psi, and hold this pressure for 5 minutes.
S12.24 End fitting serviceability. (a) Apparatus. A source of air pressure that includes a pressure gauge or monitoring system and is equipped with a mass air flow meter.
(b) Preparation. Prepare a 12-inch length of tubing and plug one end. Assemble the end fitting with the threaded retention nut on the other end of the tubing according to the end fitting manufacturer's instructions, then disassemble the fitting. Repeat the assembly and disassembly sequence three more times, and then reassemble the end fitting (five total assembly steps).
(c) Attach the end fitting with the threaded retention nut to the source of air pressure. Pressurize the tubing at a rate of 3,000 psi per minute to a pressure of 120 psi. If the end fitting leaks, measure and record the leakage rate using the mass air flow meter.
S12.25 End fitting corrosion resistance. Utilize an air brake tubing assembly or prepare a 12-inch length of tubing and install end fittings according to the end fitting manufacturer's instructions. Conduct the test specified in S6.11 using a plastic air brake tubing assembly.
S13. Test Conditions. Each hose assembly or appropriate part thereof shall be able to meet the requirements of S5, S7, S9, and S11, under the following conditions.
S13.1 The temperature of the testing room is 75 degrees Fahrenheit (24 degrees Celsius).
S13.2 The brake hoses and brake hose assemblies are at least 24 hours old, and unused.
S13.3 Specified test pressures are gauge pressures (psig).
[38 FR 31303, Nov. 13, 1973]
Editorial Note:
ForFederal Registercitations affecting §571.106, see the List of CFR Sections Affected, which appears in the Finding Aids section of the printed volume and on GPO Access.§ 571.107 [Reserved]
top§ 571.108 Standard No. 108; Lamps, reflective devices, and associated equipment.
top
Link to an amendment published at 72 FR 68266, Dec. 4, 2007.
Link to a delay published at 73 FR 50730, Aug. 28, 2008.
Link to a delay published at 74 FR 58214, Dec. 12, 2009.
S1. Scope. This standard specifies requirements for original and replacement lamps, reflective devices, and associated equipment.
S2. Purpose. The purpose of this standard is to reduce traffic accidents and deaths and injuries resulting from traffic accidents, by providing adequate illumination of the roadway, and by enhancing the conspicuity of motor vehicles on the public roads so that their presence is perceived and their signals understood, both in daylight and in darkness or other conditions of reduced visibility.
S3. Application. This standard applies to:
(a) Passenger cars, multipurpose passenger vehicles, trucks, buses, trailers (except pole trailers and trailer converter dollies), and motorcycles;
(b) Retroreflective sheeting and reflex reflectors manufactured to conform to S5.7 of this standard; and
(c) Lamps, reflective devices, and associated equipment for replacement of like equipment on vehicles to which this standard applies.
S4. Definitions.
Aiming Reference Plane means a plane which is perpendicular to the longitudinal axis of the vehicle and tangent to the forwardmost aiming pad on the headlamp.
Axis of reference means the characteristic axis of the lamp for use as the direction of reference (H = 0°, V = 0°) for angles of field for photometric measurements and for installing the lamp on the vehicle.
Beam contributor means an indivisible optical assembly including a lens, reflector, and light source, that is part of an integral beam headlighting system and contributes only a portion of a headlamp beam.
Cargo lamp is a lamp that is mounted on a multipurpose passenger vehicle, truck, or bus for the purpose of providing illumination to load or unload cargo.
Cutoff means a generally horizontal, visual/optical aiming cue in the lower beam that marks a separation between areas of higher and lower luminance.
Direct reading indicator means a device that is mounted in its entirety on a headlamp or headlamp aiming or headlamp mounting equipment, is part of a VHAD, and provides information about headlamp aim in an analog or digital format.
Effective light-emitting surface means that portion of a lamp that directs light to the photometric test pattern, and does not include transparent lenses, mounting hole bosses, reflex reflector area, beads or rims that may glow or produce small areas of increased intensity as a result of uncontrolled light from an area of 1/2 degree radius around a test point.
Effective projected luminous lens area means the area of the orthogonal projection of the effective light-emitting surface of a lamp on a plane perpendicular to a defined direction relative to the axis of reference. Unless otherwise specified, the direction is coincident with the axis of reference.
Filament means that part of the light source or light emitting element(s), such as a resistive element, the excited portion of a specific mixture of gases under pressure, or any part of other energy conversion sources, that generates radiant energy which can be seen.
Flash means a cycle of activation and deactivation of a lamp by automatic means continuing until stopped either automatically or manually.
Fully opened means the position of the headlamp concealment device in which the headlamp is in the design open operating position.
Headlamp concealment device means a device, with its operating system and components, that provides concealment of the headlamp when it is not in use, including a movable headlamp cover and a headlamp that displaces for concealment purposes.
Headlamp test fixture means a device designed to support a headlamp or headlamp assembly in the test position specified in the laboratory tests and whose mounting hardware and components are those necessary to operate the headlamp as installed in a motor vehicle.
Integral beam headlamp means a headlamp (other than a standardized sealed beam headlamp designed to conform to paragraph S7.3 or a replaceable bulb headlamp designed to conform to paragraph S7.5) comprising an integral and indivisible optical assembly including lens, reflector, and light source, except that a headlamp conforming to paragraph S7.8.5.2 or paragraph S7.8.5.3 may have a lens designed to be replaceable.
Multiple compartment lamp means a device which gives its indication by two or more separately lighted areas which are joined by one or more common parts, such as a housing or lens.
Multiple lamp arrangement means an array of two or more separate lamps on each side of the vehicle which operate together to give a signal.
Remote reading indicator means a device that is not mounted in its entirety on a headlamp or headlamp aiming or headlamp mounting equipment, but otherwise meets the definition of a direct reading indicator.
Replaceable bulb headlamp means a headlamp comprising a bonded lens and reflector assembly and one or two replaceable headlamp light sources, except that a headlamp conforming to paragraph S7.8.5.2 or paragraph S7.8.5.3 may have a lens designed to be replaceable.
Replaceable light source means an assembly of a capsule, base, and terminals that is designed to conform to the requirements of appendix A or appendix B of part 564 Replaceable Light Source Information of this Chapter.
Vehicle headlamp aiming device or VHAD means motor vehicle equipment, installed either on a vehicle or headlamp, which is used for determining the horizontal or vertical aim, or both the vertical and horizontal aim of the headlamp.
Visually/optically aimable headlamp means a headlamp which is designed to be visually/optically aimable in accordance with the requirements of paragraph S7.8.5.3 of this standard.
S5. Requirements.
S5.1 Required motor vehicle lighting equipment.
S5.1.1 Except as provided in succeeding paragraphs of this S5.1.1, each vehicle shall be equipped with at least the number of lamps, reflective devices, and associated equipment specified in Tables I and III and S7, as applicable. Required equipment shall be designed to conform to the SAE Standards or Recommended Practices referenced in those tables. Table I applies to multipurpose passenger vehicles, trucks, trailers, and buses, 80 or more inches in overall width. Table III applies to passenger cars and motorcycles and to multipurpose passenger vehicles, trucks, trailers, and buses, less than 80 inches in overall width.
S5.1.1.1 A truck tractor need not be equipped with turn signal lamps mounted on the rear if the turn signal lamps at or near the front are so constructed (double-faced) and so located that they meet the requirements for double-faced turn signals specified in SAE Standard J588e, Turn Signal Lamps, September 1970.
S5.1.1.2 A truck tractor need not be equipped with any rear side marker devices, rear clearance lamps, and rear identification lamps.
S5.1.1.3 Intermediate side marker devices are not required on vehicles less than 30 feet in overall length.
S5.1.1.4 Reflective material conforming to Federal Specification L-S-300, Sheeting and Tape, Reflective; Non-exposed Lens, Adhesive Backing, September 7, 1965, may be used for side reflex reflectors if this material as used on the vehicle, meets the performance standards in either Table I or Table IA of SAE Standard J594f, Reflex Reflectors, January 1977.
S5.1.1.5 The turn signal operating unit on each passenger car, and multipurpose passenger vehicle, truck, and bus less than 80 inches in overall width shall be self-canceling by steering wheel rotation and capable of cancellation by a manually operated control.
S5.1.1.6 Instead of the photometric values specified in Table 1 of SAE Standards J222 December 1970, or J585e September 1977, a parking lamp or tail lamp, respectively, shall meet the minimum percentage specified in Figure 1a of the corresponding minimum allowable value specified in Figure 1b. The maximum candlepower output of a parking lamp shall not exceed that prescribed in Figure 1b, or of a taillamp, that prescribed in Figure 1b at H or above. If the sum of the percentages of the minimum candlepower measured at the test points is not less than that specified for each group listed in Figure 1c, a parking lamp or taillamp is not required to meet the minimum photometric value at each test point specified in SAE Standards J222 or J585e respectively.
S5.1.1.7 A motorcycle turn signal lamp need meet only one-half of the minimum photometric values specified in Table 1 and Table 3 of SAE J588 NOV84 Turn Signal Lamps.
S5.1.1.8 For each motor vehicle less than 30 feet in overall length, the photometric minimum candlepower requirements for side marker lamps specified in SAE Standard J592e Clearance, Side Marker, and Identification Lamps, July 1972, may be met for all inboard test points at a distance of 15 feet from the vehicle and on a vertical plane that is perpendicular to the longitudinal axis of the vehicle and located midway between the front and rear side marker lamps.
S5.1.1.9 A boat trailer whose overall width is 80 inches or more need not be equipped with both front and rear clearance lamps provided an amber (to front) and red (to rear) clearance lamp is located at or near the midpoint on each side so as to indicate its extreme width.
S5.1.1.10 Multiple license plate lamps and backup lamps may be used to fufill the requirements of the SAE Standards applicable to such lamps referenced in Tables I and III.
S5.1.1.11 A stop lamp that is not optically combined, as defined by SAE Information Report J387 Terminology—Motor Vehicle Lighting NOV87, with a turn signal lamp, shall remain activated when the turn signal lamp is flashing.
S5.1.1.12 On a motor vehicle, except a passenger car, whose overall width is 2032 mm. (80 inches) or more, measurements of the effective projected luminous lens area, and of the photometrics of a multiple compartment stop lamp and a multiple compartment turn signal lamp, shall be made for the entire lamp and not for the individual compartments.
S5.1.1.13 Each passenger car, and each multipurpose passenger vehicle, truck, and bus of less than 80 inches overall width, shall be equipped with a turn signal operating unit designed to complete a durability test of 100,000 cycles.
S5.1.1.14 A trailer that is less than 30 inches in overall width may be equipped with only one taillamp, stop lamp, and rear reflex reflector, which shall be located at or near its vertical centerline.
S5.1.1.15 A trailer that is less than 6 feet in overall length, including the trailer tongue, need not be equipped with front side marker lamps and front side reflex reflectors.
S5.1.1.16 A lamp designed to use a type of bulb that has not been assigned a mean spherical candlepower rating by its manufacturer and is not listed in SAE Standard J573d, Lamp Bulbs and Sealed Units, December 1968, shall meet the applicable requirements of this standard when used with any bulb of the type specified by the lamp manufacturer, operated at the bulb's design voltage. A lamp that contains a sealed-in bulb shall meet these requirements with the bulb operated at the bulb's design voltage.
S5.1.1.17 Except for a lamp having a sealed-in bulb, a lamp shall meet the applicable requirements of this standard when tested with a bulb whose filament is positioned within ±.010 inch of the nominal design position specified in SAE Standard J573d, Lamp Bulbs and Sealed Units, December 1968, or specified by the bulb manufacturer.
S5.1.1.18 A backup lamp is not required to meet the minimum photometric values at each test point specified in Table I of SAE Standard J593c, Backup Lamps, February 1968, if the sum of the candlepower measured at the test points within each group listed in Figure 2 is not less than the group totals specified in that figure.
S5.1.1.19 Each variable load turn signal flasher shall comply with voltage drop and durability requirements of SAE Standard J590b, Turn Signal Flashers, October 1965 with the maximum design load connected, and shall comply with starting time, flash rate, and percent current “on” time requirements of J590b both with the minimum and with the maximum design load connected.
S5.1.1.20 The lowest voltage drop for turn signal flashers and hazard warning signal flashers measured between the input and load terminals shall not exceed 0.8 volt.
S5.1.1.21 A motor-driven cycle whose speed attainable in 1 mile is 30 mph or less need not be equipped with turn signal lamps.
S5.1.1.22 A motor-driven cycle whose speed attainable in 1 mile is 30 mph or less may be equipped with a stop lamp whose effective projected luminous lens area is not less than 31/2square inches and whose photometric output for the groups of test points specified in Figure 1 is at least one-half of the minimum values set forth in that figure.
S5.1.1.23-24 [Reserved]
S5.1.1.25 Each turn signal lamp on a motorcycle shall have an effective projected luminous lens area of not less than 2258 square mm. (31/2square inches).
S5.1.1.26 On a motor vehicle whose overall width is less than 80 inches:
(a) The effective projected luminous lens area of a single compartment stop lamp, and a single compartment rear turn signal lamp, shall be not less than 50 square centimeters (73/4square inches).
(b) If a multiple compartment lamp or multiple lamps are used to meet the photometric requirements for stop lamps and rear turn signal lamps, the effective projected luminous lens area of each compartment or lamp shall be at least 22 square centimeters, provided the combined area is at least 50 square centimeters (73/4square inches).
S5.1.1.27 (a) Except as provided in paragraph (b) of this section, each passenger car manufactured on or after September 1, 1985, and each multipurpose passenger vehicle, truck, and bus, whose overall width is less than 80 inches, whose GVWR is 10,000 pounds or less, manufactured on or after September 1, 1993, shall be equipped with a high-mounted stop lamp which:
(1) Shall have an effective projected luminous lens area not less than 2903 square mm. (41/2square inches).
(2) Shall meet the visibility requirements specified in S5.3.2(c).
(3) Shall have the minimum photometric values in the amount and location listed in Figure 10.
(4) Need not meet the requirements of paragraphs 3.1.6 Moisture Test, 3.1.7 Dust Test, and 3.1.8 Corrosion Test of SAE Recommended Practice J186a, Supplemental High-Mounted Stop and Rear Turn Signal Lamps, September 1977, if it is mounted inside the vehicle.
(5) Shall provide access for convenient replacement of the bulb without the use of special tools.
(b) Each multipurpose passenger vehicle, truck and bus whose overall width is less than 80 inches, whose GVWR is 10,000 pounds or less, whose vertical centerline, when the vehicle is viewed from the rear, is not located on a fixed body panel but separates one or two movable body sections, such as doors, which lacks sufficient space to install a single high-mounted stop lamp on the centerline above such body sections, and which is manufactured on or after September 1, 1993, shall have two high-mounted stop lamps which:
(1) Are identical in size and shape and have an effective projected luminous lens area not less than 1452 square mm. (21/4square inches) each.
(2) Shall meet the visibility requirements specified in S5.3.2(d).
(3) Together have the minimum photometric values specified in paragraph (a)(3) of this S5.1.1.27.
(4) Shall provide access for convenient replacement of the bulbs without special tools.
S5.1.1.28 [Reserved]
S5.1.1.29 A trailer equipped with a conspicuity treatment in conformance with paragraph S5.7 of this standard need not be equipped with the reflex reflectors required by Table I of this standard if the conspicuity material is placed at the locations of the reflex reflectors required by Table I.
S5.1.2 Plastic materials used for optical parts such as lenses and reflectors shall conform to SAE Recommended Practice J576 JUL91, except that:
(a) Plastic lenses (other than those incorporating reflex reflectors) used for inner lenses or those covered by another material and not exposed directly to sunlight shall meet the requirements of paragraphs 3.3 and 4.2 of SAE J576 JUL91 when covered by the outer lens or other material;
(b) After the outdoor exposure test, the haze and loss of surface luster of plastic materials (other than those incorporating reflex reflectors) used for outer lenses shall not be greater than 30 percent haze as measured by ASTM D 1003–92, Haze and Luminous Transmittance of Transparent Plastic;
(c) After the outdoor exposure test, plastic materials used for reflex reflectors and for lenses used in front of reflex reflectors shall not show surface deterioration, crazing, dimensional changes, color bleeding, delamination, loss of surface luster, or haze that exceeds 7 percent as measured under ASTM D 1003–92.
(d) The thickness of the test specimens specified in paragraph 3.2.2 of SAE J576 JUL91 may vary by as much as ±0.25 mm.
(e) After exposure to the heat test as specified in subparagraph (f) of this paragraph, and after cooling to room ambient temperature, a test specimen shall show no change in shape and general appearance discernable to the naked eye when compared with an unexposed specimen. The trichromatic coefficients of the samples shall conform to the requirements of SAE J578c, Color Specification for Electric Signal Lighting Devices, February 1977.
(f) Two samples of each thickness of each plastic material are used in the heat test. Each sample is supported at the bottom, with at least 51 mm. of the sample above the support, in the vertical position in such a manner that, on each side, the minimum uninterrupted area of exposed surface is not less than 3225 sq. mm. The samples are placed for two hours in a circulating air oven at 79 ±3 degrees C.
(g) All outdoor exposure tests shall be 3 years in duration, whether the material is exposed or protected. Accelerated weathering procedures are not permitted.
S5.1.3 No additional lamp, reflective device or other motor vehicle equipment shall be installed that impairs the effectiveness of lighting equipment required by this standard.
5.1.4 Except for multifunction school activity buses, each school bus shall be equipped with a system of either:
(a) Four red signal lamps designed to conform to SAE Standard J887, School Bus Red Signal Lamps, July 1964, and installed in accordance with that standard; or
(b) Four red signal lamps designed to conform to SAE Standard J887, School Bus Red Signal Lamps, July 1964, and four amber signal lamps designed to conform to that standard, except for their color, and except that their candlepower shall be at least 21/2times that specified for red signal lamps. Both red and amber lamps shall be installed in accordance with SAE Standard J887, except that:
(i) Each amber signal lamp shall be located near each red signal lamp, at the same level, but closer to the vertical centerline of the bus; and
(ii) The system shall be wired so that the amber signal lamps are activated only by manual or foot operation, and if activated, are automatically deactivated and the red signal lamps automatically activated when the bus entrance door is opened.
S5.1.5 The color in all lamps, reflective devices, and associated equipment to which this standard applies shall comply with SAE Standard J578c, Color Specification for Electric Signal Lighting Devices, February 1977.
S5.2 Other requirements.
S5.2.1 The words “it is recommended that,” “recommendations,” or “should be” appearing in any SAE Standard or Recommended Practice referenced or subreferenced in this standard shall be read as setting forth mandatory requirements, except that the aiming pads on the lens face and the black area surrounding the signal lamp recommended in SAE Standard J887, School Bus Red Signal Lamps, July 1964, are not required.
S5.2.2 The words “Type 1 (53/4&inch;),” “Type 2 (53/4&inch;),” “Type 2 (7&inch;),” “Type 1A,” “Type 2A,” and “Type 2B” appearing in any SAE Standard or Recommended Practice referenced or subreferenced in this standard shall also be read as setting forth requirements respectively for the following types of headlamps: 1C1, 2C1, 2D1, 1A1, 2A1, and 2B1.
S5.3 Location of required equipment. Except as provided in paragraphs S5.3.2, S5.7, and S7, each lamp, reflective device, and item of associated equipment shall be securely mounted on a rigid part of the vehicle other than glazing that is not designed to be removed except for repair, in accordance with the requirements of Table I and Table III, as applicable, and in the location specified in Table II (multipurpose passenger vehicles, trucks, trailers, and buses 80 or more inches in overall width) or Table IV (all passenger cars, and motorcycles, and multipurpose passenger vehicles, truck, trailers and buses less than 80 inches in overall width), as applicable.
S5.3.1 [Reserved]
S5.3.1.1 [Reserved]
S5.3.1.1.1 [Reserved]
S5.3.1.2 On a truck tractor, the red rear reflex reflectors may be mounted on the back of the cab, at a minimum height not less than 4 inches above the height of the rear tires.
S5.3.1.3 On a trailer, the amber front side reflex reflectors and amber front side marker lamps may be located as far forward as practicable exclusive of the trailer tongue.
S5.3.1.4 When the rear identification lamps are mounted at the extreme height of a vehicle, rear clearance lamps need not meet the requirement of Table II that they be located as close as practicable to the top of the vehicle.
S5.3.1.5 [Reserved]
S5.3.1.6 On a truck tractor, clearance lamps mounted on the cab may be located to indicate the width of the cab, rather than the overall width of the vehicle.
S5.3.1.7 On a motor vehicle on which the front turn signal lamp is less than 100 mm from the lighted edge of a lower beam headlamp, as measured from the optical center of the turn signal lamp, the multiplier applied to obtain the required minimum luminous intensities shall be 2.5.
S5.3.1.8 (a) Each high-mounted stop lamp installed in or on a vehicle subject to S5.1.1.27(a) shall be located as follows:
(1) With its center at any place on the vertical centerline of the vehicle, including the glazing, as the vehicle is viewed from the rear.
(2) If the lamp is mounted below the rear window, no portion of the lens shall be lower than 6 inches below the rear window on convertibles, or 3 inches on other passenger cars.
(3) If the lamp is mounted inside the vehicle, means shall be provided to minimize reflections from the light of the lamp upon the rear window glazing that might be visible to the driver when viewed directly, or indirectly in the rearview mirror.
(b) The high-mounted stop lamps installed in or on a vehicle subject to S5.1.1.27(b) shall be located at the same height, with one vertical edge of each lamp on the vertical edge of the body section nearest the vertical centerline.
S5.3.2 Except as provided in S5.3.2.1 through S5.3.2.4 and in paragraphs S5.7 and S7, each vehicle must conform to the following requirements:
(a) Each lamp and reflective device must be installed in a location where it complies with all applicable photometric requirements and visibility requirements, with all obstructions ( e.g. , mirrors, snow plows, wrecker booms, backhoes, and winches) installed on the vehicle.
(b) A manufacturer must certify compliance of each lamp to one of the following visibility requirement options, and it may not thereafter choose a different option for that vehicle:
(1) When a vehicle is equipped with any lamp listed in Figure 19 of this standard, each such lamp must provide not less than 12.5 square centimeters of unobstructed effective projected luminous lens area in any direction throughout the pattern defined by the corner points specified in Figure 19 for each such lamp; or
(2) When a vehicle is equipped with any lamp listed in Figure 20 of this standard, each such lamp must provide a luminous intensity not less than that specified in Figure 20 in any direction throughout the pattern defined by the corner points specified in Figure 20 for each such lamp. The luminous intensity must be measured in accordance with the photometry test requirements of the applicable SAE Standards and Recommended Practices incorporated by reference or subreference in this standard.
(c) A high mounted stop lamp must have a signal visible to the rear through a horizontal angle from 45 degrees to the left to 45 degrees to the right of the longitudinal axis of the vehicle.
(d) High mounted stop lamps required to comply with S5.1.1.27(b) must together have a signal to the rear as specified in S5.3.2(c).
(e) Backup lamps must be mounted on the rear so that the optical center of at least one lamp is visible from any eye point elevation from at least 1828 mm (6 ft) to 610 mm (2 ft) above the horizontal plane on which the vehicle is standing; and from any position in the area, rearward of a vertical plane perpendicular to the longitudinal axis of the vehicle, 914 mm (3 ft) to the rear of the vehicle and extending 914 mm (3 ft) beyond each side of the vehicle.
S5.3.2.1 Clearance lamps may be located at a location other than on the front and rear if necessary to indicate the overall width of a vehicle, or for protection from damage during normal operation of the vehicle, and at such a location they need not meet the photometric output at any test point that is 45 degrees inboard.
S5.3.2.2 If any required lamp or reflective device is obstructed by motor vehicle equipment ( e.g. , mirrors, snow plows, wrecker booms, backhoes, winches, etc.), and cannot meet requirements of S5.3.2, the vehicle must be equipped with an additional lamp or device of the same type which meet all applicable requirements of this standard, including S5.3.2.
S5.3.2.3 For signal lamps and reflective devices mounted less than 750 mm above the road surface as measured to the lamp axis of reference, the vertical test point angles located below the horizontal plane subject to photometric and visibility requirements of this standard may be reduced to 5 degrees.
S5.3.2.4 As an alternative to S5.3.2(b), each passenger car and motorcycle, and each multipurpose passenger vehicle, truck, trailer and bus that is of less than 2032 mm overall width, that are manufactured on or before September 1, 2011, and each multipurpose passenger vehicle, truck, trailer and bus of 2032 mm or more overall width that is manufactured on or before September 1, 2014, must have each lamp located so that it meets the visibility requirements specified in any applicable SAE Standard or Recommended Practice.
S5.4 Equipment combinations. Two or more lamps, reflective devices, or items of associated equipment may be combined if the requirements for each lamp, reflective device, and item of associated equipment are met, with the following exceptions:
(a) No high-mounted stop lamp shall be combined with any other lamp or reflective device, other than with a cargo lamp.
(b) No high-mounted stop lamp shall be combined optically, as defined by SAE Information Report J387 Terminology—Motor Vehicle Lighting NOV87, with any cargo lamp.
(c) No clearance lamp shall be combined optically, as defined by SAE Information Report J387 Terminology—Motor Vehicle Lighting NOV87, with any taillamp.
S5.5 Special wiring requirements.
S.5.5.1 Each vehicle shall have a means of switching between lower and upper beams that conforms to SAE Recommended Practice J564a Headlamp Beam Switching, April 1964 or to SAE Recommended Practice J565b, Semi-Automatic Headlamp Beam Switching Devices, February 1969. Except as provided in S5.5.8, the lower and upper beams shall not be energized simultaneously except momentarily for temporary signalling purposes or during switching between beams.
S5.5.2 Each vehicle shall have a means for indicating to the driver when the upper beams of the headlamps are on that conforms to SAE Recommended Practice J564a, April 1964, except that the signal color need not be red.
S5.5.3 The taillamps on each vehicle shall be activated when the headlamps are activated in a steady-burning state, but need not be activated if the headlamps are activated at less than full intensity as permitted by paragraph S5.5.11(a).
S5.5.4 The stop lamps on each vehicle shall be activated upon application of the service brakes. The high-mounted stop lamp on each vehicle shall be activated only upon application of the service brakes.
S5.5.5 The vehicular hazard warning signal operating unit on each vehicle shall operate independently of the ignition or equivalent switch, and when activated, shall cause to flash simultaneously sufficient turn signal lamps to meet, as a minimum, the turn signal lamp photometric requirements of this standard.
S5.5.6 Each vehicle equipped with a turn signal operating unit shall also have an illuminated pilot indicator. Failure of one or more turn signal lamps to operate shall be indicated in accordance with SAE Standard J588e, Turn Signal Lamps, September 1970, except when a variable-load turn signal flasher is used on a truck, bus, or multipurpose passenger vehicle 80 or more inches in overall width, on a truck that is capable of accommodating a slide-in camper, or on any vehicle equipped to tow trailers.
S5.5.7 On each passenger car and motorcycle, and on each multipurpose passenger vehicle, truck, and bus of less than 80 inches overall width:
(a) When the parking lamps are activated, the taillamps, license plate lamps, and side marker lamps shall also be activated; and
(b) When the headlamps are activated in a steady-burning state, the tail lamps, parking lamps, license plate lamps and side marker lamps shall also be activated.
S5.5.8 On a motor vehicle equipped with a headlighting system designed to conform to the photometric requirements of Figure 15–1 or Figure 15–2, the lamps marked “L” or “LF” may be wired to remain permanently activated when the lamps marked “U” or “UF” are activated. On a motor vehicle equipped with an Integral Beam headlighting system meeting the photometric requirements of paragraph S7.4(a)(1)(ii), the lower beam headlamps shall be wired to remain permanently activated when the upper beam headlamps are activated. On a motor vehicle equipped with a headlighting system designed to conform to the requirements of Figure 17–1 or Figure 17–2, a lower beam light source may be wired to remain activated when an upper beam light source is activated if the lower beam light source contributes to compliance of the headlighting system with the upper beam requirements of Figure 17–1 or Figure 17–2.
S5.5.9 Except as provided in section S5.5.8, the wiring harness or connector assembly of each headlamp system shall be designed so that only those light sources intended for meeting lower beam photometrics are energized when the beam selector switch is in the lower beam position, and that only those light sources intended for meeting upper beam photometrics are energized when the beam selector switch is in the upper beam position.
S5.5.10 The wiring requirements for lighting equipment in use are:
(a) Turn signal lamps, hazard warning signal lamps, and school bus warning lamps shall be wired to flash;
(b) Headlamps and side marker lamps may be wired to flash for signaling purposes;
(c) A motorcycle headlamp may be wired to allow either its upper beam or its lower beam, but not both, to modulate from a higher intensity to a lower intensity in accordance with section S5.6;
(d) All other lamps shall be wired to be steady-burning.
S5.5.11(a) Any pair of lamps on the front of a passenger car, multipurpose passenger vehicle, truck, or bus, whether or not required by this standard, other than parking lamps or fog lamps, may be wired to be automatically activated, as determined by the manufacturer of the vehicle, in a steady burning state as daytime running lamps (DRLs) and to be automatically deactivated when the headlamp control is in any “on” position, and as otherwise determined by the manufacturer of the vehicle, provided that each such lamp:
(1) Has a luminous intensity not less than 500 candela at test point H-V, nor more than 3,000 candela at any location in the beam, when tested in accordance with Section S11 of this standard, unless it is:
(i) A lower beam headlamp intended to operate as a DRL at full voltage, or at a voltage lower than used to operate it as a lower beam headlamp; or
(ii) An upper beam headlamp intended to operate as a DRL, whose luminous intensity at test point H-V is not more than 7,000 candela, and which is mounted not higher than 864 mm above the road surface as measured from the center of the lamp with the vehicle at curb weight;
(2) Is permanently marked “DRL” on its lens in letters not less than 3 mm high, unless it is optically combined with a headlamp;
(3) Is designed to provide the same color as the other lamp in the pair, and that is one of the following colors as defined in SAE Standard J578 MAY88: White, white to yellow, white to selective yellow, selective yellow, or yellow;
(4) If not optically combined with a turn signal lamp, is located so that the distance from its lighted edge to the optical center of the nearest turn signal lamp is not less than 100 mm, unless:
(i) The luminous intensity of the DRL is not more than 2,600 candela at any location in the beam and the turn signal meets the requirements of S5.3.1.7; or
(ii) (For a passenger car, multipurpose passenger vehicle, truck, or bus that is manufactured before October 1, 1995, and which uses an upper beam headlamp as a DRL as specified in paragraph S5.5.11(a)(1)(ii)) the luminous intensity of the DRL is greater than 2,600 candela at any location in the beam and the turn signal lamp meets the requirements of S5.3.1.7; or
(iii) The DRL is optically combined with a lower beam headlamp and the turn signal lamp meets the requirements of S5.3.1.7; or
(iv) The DRL is deactivated when the turn signal or hazard warning signal lamp is activated.
(5) If optically combined with a turn signal lamp, is automatically deactivated as a DRL when the turn signal lamp or hazard warning lamp is activated, and automatically reactivated as a DRL when the turn signal lamp or hazard warning lamp is deactivated.
(b) Any pair of lamps that are not required by this standard and are not optically combined with any lamps that are required by this standard, and which are used as DRLs to fulfill the specifications of S5.5.11(a), shall be mounted at the same height, which shall be not more than 1.067 m above the road surface measured from the center of the lamp on the vehicle at curb weight, and shall be symmetrically disposed about the vertical centerline of the vehicle.
S5.6 [Reserved]
S5.7 Conspicuity Systems. Each trailer of 80 or more inches overall width, and with a GVWR over 10,000 lbs., manufactured on or after December 1, 1993, except a trailer designed exclusively for living or office use, and each truck tractor manufactured on or after July 1, 1997, shall be equipped with either retroreflective sheeting that meets the requirements of S5.7.1, reflex reflectors that meet the requirements of S5.7.2, or a combination of retroreflective sheeting and reflex reflectors that meet the requirement of S5.7.3.
S5.7.1 Retroreflective sheeting. Each trailer or truck tractor to which S5.7 applies that does not conform to S5.7.2 or S5.7.3 shall be equipped with retroreflective sheeting that conforms to the requirements specified in S5.7.1.1 through S5.7.1.5.
S5.7.1.1 Construction. Retroreflective sheeting shall consist of a smooth, flat, transparent exterior film with retroreflective elements embedded or suspended beneath the film so as to form a non-exposed retroreflective optical system.
S5.7.1.2 Performance requirements. Retroreflective sheeting shall meet the requirements of ASTM D 4956–90, Standard Specification for Retroreflective Sheeting for Traffic Control, for Type V Sheeting, except for the photometric requirements, and shall meet the minimum photometric performance requirements specified in Figure 29.
S5.7.1.3 Sheeting pattern, dimensions, and relative coefficients of retroreflection.
(a) Retroreflective sheeting shall be applied in a pattern of alternating white and red color segments to the sides and rear of each trailer, and to the rear of each truck tractor, and in white to the upper rear corners of each trailer and truck tractor, in the locations specified in S5.7.1.4, and Figures 30–1 through 30–4, or Figure 31, as appropriate.
(b) Except for a segment that is trimmed to clear obstructions, or lengthened to provide red sheeting near red lamps, each white or red segment shall have a length of 300 mm ±150 mm.
(c) Neither white nor red sheeting shall represent more than two thirds of the aggregate of any continuous strip marking the width of a trailer, or any continuous or broken strip marking its length.
(d) Retroreflective sheeting shall have a width of not less than 50 mm (Grade DOT-C2), 75 mm (Grade DOT-C3), or 100 mm (Grade DOT-C4).
(e) The coefficients for retroreflection of each segment of red or white sheeting shall be not less than the minimum values specified in Figure 29 of this standard for grades DOT-C2, DOT-C3, and DOT-C4.
S5.7.1.4 Location. (a) Retroreflective sheeting shall be applied to each trailer and truck tractor as specified below, but need not be applied to discontinuous surfaces such as outside ribs, stake post pickets on platform trailers, and external protruding beams, or to items of equipment such as door hinges and lamp bodies on trailers and body joints, stiffening beads, drip rails and rolled surfaces on truck tractors.
(b) The edge of white sheeting shall not be located closer than 75 mm to the edge of the luminous lens area of any red or amber lamp that is required by this standard.
(c) The edge of red sheeting shall not be located closer than 75 mm to the edge of the luminous lens area of any amber lamp that is required by this standard.
S5.7.1.4.1 Rear of trailers. Retroreflective sheeting shall be applied to the rear of each trailer as follows, except that Element 2 is not required for container chassis or for platform trailers without bulkheads, and Element 3 is not required for trailers without underride protection devices:
(a) Element 1: A strip of sheeting, as horizontal as practicable, in alternating colors across the full width of the trailer, as close to the extreme edges as practicable, and as close as practicable to not less than 375 mm and not more than 1525 mm above the road surface at the stripe centerline with the trailer at curb weight.
(b) Element 2: Two pairs of white strips of sheeting, each pair consisting of strips 300 mm long of grade DOT-C2, DOT-C3, or DOT-C4, applied horizontally and vertically to the right and left upper contours of the body, as viewed from the rear, as close to the top of the trailer and as far apart as practicable. If the perimeter of the body, as viewed from the rear, is other than rectangular, the strips may be applied along the perimeter, as close as practicable to the uppermost and outermost areas of the rear of the body on the left and right sides.
(c) Element 3: A strip of sheeting in alternating colors across the full width of the horizontal member of the rear underride protection device. Grade DOT-C2 material not less than 38 mm wide may be used.
S5.7.1.4.2 Side of trailers. Retroreflective sheeting shall be applied to each side of a trailer as follows:
(a) A strip of sheeting, as horizontal as practicable, in alternating colors, originating and terminating as close to the front and rear as practicable, as close as practicable to not less than 375 mm and not more than 1525 mm above the road surface at the stripe centerline with the trailer at curb weight, except that at the location chosen the strip shall not be obscured in whole or in part by other motor vehicle equipment or trailer cargo. The strip need not be continuous as long as not less than half of the length of the trailer is covered and the spaces are distributed as evenly as practicable.
(b) If necessary to clear rivet heads or other similar obstructions, grade DOT-C2 retroreflective sheeting may be separated into two 25 mm wide strips of the same length and color, separated by a space of not more than 25 mm, and used in place of the retroreflective sheeting that would otherwise be applied.
S5.7.1.4.3 Rear of truck tractors. Retroreflective sheeting shall be applied to the rear of each truck tractor as follows:
(a) Element 1: Two strips of sheeting in alternating colors, each not less than 600 mm long, located as close as practicable to the edges of the rear fenders, mudflaps, or the mudflap support brackets, to mark the width of the truck tractor. The strips shall be mounted as horizontal as practicable, in a vertical plane facing the rear, on the rear fenders, on the mudflap support brackets, on plates attached to the mudflap support brackets, or on the mudflaps. Strips on mudflaps shall be mounted not lower than 300 mm below the upper horizontal edge of the mudflap. If the vehicle is certified with temporary mudflap support brackets, the strips shall be mounted on the mudflaps or on plates transferable to permanent mudflap support brackets. For a truck tractor without mudflaps, the strips may be mounted outboard of the frame on brackets behind the rear axle or on brackets ahead of the rear axle and above the top of the tires at unladen vehicle height, or they may be mounted directly or indirectly to the back of the cab as close to the outer edges as practicable, above the top of the tires, and not more than 1525 mm above the road surface at unladen vehicle height. If the strips are mounted on the back of the cab, no more than 25 percent of their cumulative area may be obscured by vehicle equipment as determined in a rear orthogonal view.
(b) Element 2: Two pairs of white strips of sheeting, each pair consisting of strips 300 mm long, applied as horizontally and vertically as practicable, to the right and left upper contours of the cab, as close to the top of the cab and as far apart as practicable. No more than 25 percent of their cumulative area may be obscured by vehicle equipment as determined in a rear orthogonal view. If one pair must be relocated to avoid obscuration by vehicle equipment, the other pair may be relocated in order to be mounted symmetrically. If the rear window is so large as to occupy all the practicable space, the material may be attached to the edge of the window itself.
S5.7.1.5 Certification. The letters DOT-C2, DOT-C3, or DOT-C4, as appropriate, constituting a certification that the retroreflective sheeting conforms to the requirements of S5.7.1.2, shall appear at least once on the exposed surface of each white or red segment of retroreflective sheeting, and at least once every 300 mm on retroreflective sheeting that is white only. The characters shall be not less than 3 mm high, and shall be permanently stamped, etched, molded, or printed in indelible ink.
S5.7.2 Reflex Reflectors. Each trailer or truck tractor to which S5.7 applies that does not conform to S5.7.1 or S5.7.3 shall be equipped with reflex reflectors in accordance with this section.
S5.7.2.1 (a) Each reflex reflector shall conform to SAE Standard J594f, Reflex Reflectors, January 1977.
(b) Each red reflex reflector shall also provide, at an observation angle of 0.2 degree, not less than 300 millicandelas/lux at any light entrance angle between 30 degrees left and 30 degrees right, including an entrance angle of 0 degree, and not less than 75 millicandelas/lux at any light entrance angle between 45 degrees left and 45 degrees right.
(c) Each white reflex reflector shall also provide at an observation angle of 0.2 degree, not less than 1250 millicandelas/lux at any light entrance angle between 30 degrees left and 30 degrees right, including an entrance angle of 0 degree, and not less than 300 millicandelas/lux at any light entrance angle between 45 degrees left and 45 degrees right.
(d) A white reflex reflector complying with S5.7.2.1(a) and (c) when tested in a horizontal orientation may be installed in all orientations specified for rear upper locations in S5.7.1.4.1(b) or S5.7.1.4.3(b) if, when tested in a vertical orientation, it provides an observation angle of 0.2 degree not less than 1680 millicandelas/lux at a light entrance angle of 0 degree, not less than 1120 millicandelas/lux at any light entrance angle from 10 degrees down to 10 degrees up, and not less than 560 millicandelas/lux at any light entrance angle from 20 degrees right to 20 degrees left.
S5.7.2.2 Reflex reflectors shall be installed and located as specified below:
(a) In the same locations and in the same length in which retroreflective sheeting is required by S5.7.1.4 to be applied in alternating colors, reflex reflectors shall be installed in a repetitive pattern of two or three white reflex reflectors alternating with two or three red reflex reflectors, with the center of each reflector not more than 100 mm from the center of each adjacent reflector.
(b) In the same locations and in the same length in which white retroreflective sheeting is required by S5.7.1.4 to be installed, white reflex reflectors shall be installed, with the center of each white reflex reflector not more than 100 mm from the center of each adjacent reflector.
S5.7.2.3 Certification. The exposed surface of each reflex reflector shall be marked with the letters DOT-C which constitutes a certification that the reflector conforms to all applicable requirements of §571.108 of this part. The certification shall be not less than 3 mm high, and permanently stamped, etched, molded or printed in indelible ink.
S5.7.3 Combination of sheeting and reflectors. Each trailer or truck tractor to which S5.7 applies that does not conform to S5.7.1 or S5.7.2, shall be equipped with retroreflective materials that meet the requirements of S5.7.1 except that reflex reflectors that meet the requirements of S5.7.2.1, and that are installed in accordance with S5.7.2.2, may be used instead of any corresponding element of retroreflective sheeting located as required by S5.7.1.4.
S5.8 Replacement Equipment.
S5.8.1 Except as provided below, each lamp, reflective device, or item of associated equipment manufactured to replace any lamp, reflective device, or item of associated equipment on any vehicle to which this standard applies, shall be designed to conform to this standard.
S5.8.2 A Type C replacement headlamp designed to conform to the requirements of paragraph S7.3.2(a) through (d) of this standard may be marked “1” and “2” rather than “1C1” and “2C1” respectively. A Type D replacement headlamp designed to conform to S7.3.2(a) through (c) and S7.3.5(b) of this standard may be marked “TOP” or “2” rather than “2D1”.
S5.8.3 (a) Each stop lamp manufactured to replace a stop lamp that was designed to conform to SAE Standard J586b, Stop Lamps, June 1966, may also be designed to conform to J586b. It shall meet the photometric minimum candlepower requirements for Class A red turn signal lamps specified in SAE Standard J575d, Test for Motor Vehicle Lighting Devices and Components, August 1967. Each such lamp manufactured for use on a passenger car and on a multipurpose passenger vehicle, truck, trailer or bus less than 2032 mm. (80 inches) in overall width shall have an effective projected luminous lens area not less than 2258 square mm. (31/2square inches). If multiple compartment lamps or multiple lamps are used, the effective projected luminous lens area of each compartment or lamp shall be not less than 2258 square mm. (31/2square inches); however, the photometric requirements may be met by a combination of compartments or lamps.
(b) Each stop lamp manufactured to replace a stop lamp that was designed to conform to SAE Standard J586c, Stop Lamps, August 1970, may also be designed to conform to J586c.
S5.8.4 (a) Each turn signal lamp manufactured to replace a turn signal lamp that was designed to conform to SAE Standard J588d, Turn Signal Lamps, June 1966, may also be designed to conform to J588d, and shall meet the photometric minimum candlepower requirements for Class A turn signal lamps specified in SAE Standard J575d, Tests for Motor Vehicle Lighting Devices and Components, August 1967. Each such lamp manufactured for use on a passenger car and on a multipurpose passenger vehicle, truck, trailer or bus less than 80 inches in overall width shall have an effective projected luminous area not less than 31/2square inches. If multiple compartment lamps or multiple lamps are used, the effective projected luminous area of each compartment or lamp shall be not less than 31/2square inches; however, the photometric requirements may be met by a combination of compartments or lamps. Each such lamp manufactured for use on a multipurpose passenger vehicle, truck, trailer or bus 80 inches or more in overall width shall have an effective projected luminous area not less than 12 square inches.
(b) Each turn signal lamp manufactured to replace a turn signal lamp that was designed to conform to SAE Standard J588e, Turn Signal Lamps, September 1970, may also be designed to conform to SAE Standard J588e.
S5.8.5 Note 6 of Table 1 of SAE Standard J588e does not apply.
S5.8.6. Instead of the photometric values specified in SAE Standards J586c and J588e, a stop lamp manufactured to replace a stop lamp designed to conform to SAE Standard J586c, or a turn signal lamp manufactured to replace a turn signal lamp designed to conform to SAE Standard J588e, shall meet the minimum percentage specified in Figure 1a of the corresponding minimum allowable value specified in Figure 1b. The maximum candlepower output of each such stop lamp or turn signal lamp shall not exceed that prescribed in Figure 1b. If the sum of the percentages of the minimum candlepower measured at the test points is not less than that specified for each group listed in Figure 1c, a stop lamp or turn signal lamp is not required to meet the minimum photometric value at each test point specified in SAE Standards J586c and J588e, respectively.
S5.8.7 Note 6 of Table 1 in SAE Standard J588e, Turn Signal Lamps, September 1970, does not apply.
S5.8.8 Each taillamp manufactured to replace a taillamp designed to conform to SAE Standard J585d, Tail Lamps, August 1970, may also be designed to conform to J585d.
S5.8.9 Each turn signal lamp manufactured to replace a turn signal lamp (on a motorcycle) that was designed to conform to SAE Standard J588d, Turn Signal Lamps, June 1966, may also be designed to conform to J588d.
S5.8.10 Unless otherwise specified in this standard, each lamp, reflective device, or item of associated equipment to which paragraph S5.8.1 applies may be labeled with the symbol DOT, which shall constitute a certification that it conforms to applicable Federal motor vehicle safety standards.
S5.8.11 A replacement lens for a replaceable bulb headlamp or an integral beam headlamp that is not required to have a bonded lens shall be provided with a replacement seal in a package that includes instructions for the removal and replacement of the lens, the cleaning of the reflector, and the sealing of the replacement lens to the reflector assembly.
S6. Subreferenced SAE Standards and Recommended Practices
S6.1 SAE Standards and Recommended Practices subreferenced by the SAE Standards and Recommended Practices included in Tables I and III and paragraphs S5.1.4 and S5.5.1 are those published in the 1970 edition of the SAE Handbook, except that the SAE standard referred to as “J575” is J575e, Tests for Motor Vehicle Lighting Devices and Components, August 1970, for stoplamps designed to conform to SAE Standards J586c, J586 FEB84, and J1398 MAY85; for taillamps designed to conform to SAE Standards J585d and J585e; for turn signal lamps designed to conform to SAE Standards J588e, J588 NOV84, and J1395 APR85; and for high-mounted stoplamps designed to conform to SAE Recommended Practice J186a. The reference in J585e to J256 does not apply. For headlamps other than motorcycle headlamps, unless otherwise specified in this standard, the version of SAE Standard J575 is DEC88, and the version of SAE Standard J602 is OCT80.The definition of “optically combined” in SAE Information Report J387 Terminology—Motor Vehicle Lighting NOV87, applies to that term as used in J586c and J588e.
S6.2 Requirements of SAE Standards incorporated by reference in this standard, other than J576b and J576c, do not include test for warpage of devices with plastic lenses.
S6.3 The term “functional lighted lens area” in any SAE Standard or Recommended Practice incorporated by reference or by subreference in this standard, has the same meaning as the term “effective projected luminous lens area.”
S7. Headlighting requirements.
S7.1 Each passenger car, multipurpose passenger vehicle, truck, and bus manufactured on or after September 1, 1994, shall be equipped with a headlighting system designed to conform to the requirements of S7.3, S7.4, S7.5, or S7.6.
S7.2(a) The lens of each original and replacement equipment headlamp, and of each original equipment and replacement equipment beam contributor shall be marked with the symbol “DOT” either horizontally or vertically which shall constitute the certification required by 49 U.S.C. 30115.
(b) The lens of each headlamp and of each beam contributor manufactured on or after December 1, 1989, to which paragraph (a) of this section applies shall be marked with the name and/or trademark registered with the U.S. Patent and Trademark Office of the manufacturer of such headlamp or beam contributor, or its importer, or any manufacturer of a vehicle equipped with such headlamp or beam contributor. Nothing in this paragraph shall be construed to authorize the marking of any such name and/or trademark by one who is not the owner, unless the owner has consented to it.
(c) Each headlamp and beam contributor to which paragraph (a) of this section applies shall be marked with its voltage and with its part or trade number.
(d) Unless stated otherwise, a tolerance of ±1/4degree is permitted during photometric performance tests for any headlamp or beam contributor, and the test points 10U–90U shall be measured from the normally exposed surface of the lens face. The term ‘aiming plane’ means ‘aiming reference plane’ or an appropriate vertical plane defined by the manufacturer as required in S7.7.1.
(e) Each replacement headlamp lens with seal, provided in accordance with S5.8.11, when installed according to the lens manufacturer's instructions on an integral beam or replaceable bulb headlamp, shall not cause the headlamp to fail to comply with any of the requirements of this standard. Each replacement headlamp lens shall be marked with the symbol “DOT”, either horizontally or vertically, to constitute certification. Each replacement headlamp lens shall also be marked with the manufacturer and the part or trade number of the headlamp for which it is intended, and with the name and/or trademark of the lens manufacturer or importer that is registered with the U.S. Patent and Trademark Office. Nothing in this paragraph shall be construed to authorize the marking of any such name and/or trademark by one who is not the owner, unless the owner has consented to it.
S7.3 Sealed beam headlighting system. A sealed beam headlighting system shall be designed to meet the requirements of one of the following subparagraphs of S7.3.2 through S7.3.9. In references to Figures in SAE J1383 APR85 for headlamp dimensional requirements, only those dimensions marked “I” for interchangeability are applicable.
S7.3.1 The lens of each sealed beam headlamp designed to conform to S7.3.2 through S7.3.6 shall be marked according to paragraph 5.4.3 through 5.4.5 of SAE Standard J1383 APR85 Performance Requirements for Motor Vehicle Headlamps.
S7.3.2 Type A headlighting system. A Type A headlighting system consists of two Type 1A1 and two Type 2A1 headlamps and associated hardware, which are designed to conform to the following requirements:
(a) SAE Standard J1383 APR85 Performance Requirements for Motor Vehicle Headlamps, with the following exceptions:
(1) Paragraphs 1, 2.1.2, 2.8.2, 3, 4.1.1, 4.1.2, 4.1.3, 4.4, 4.6, 4.8 through 4.18, 5.1.1, 5.1.3, 5.1.5, 5.1.7 through 5.1.16, 5.2.2, 5.3.5, 5.4.1, 5.4.2, and 6 through 6.4 do not apply.
(2) In paragraph 5.3.2, the words “and retaining rings” are omitted.
(3) In paragraphs 4.5.2 and 5.1.6, the words “Figure 28–1 or 28–2 of Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 108” are substituted for “Table 3.”
(b) SAE Standard J580 DEC86 Sealed Beam Headlamp Assembly (except paragraphs 3, 4.1.1, 5.1.1.1, 5.1.2.3, and the second sentence of 5.1.6); in 5.2.1, delete the words “and retaining rings;” the correct reference is SAE J1383 Figures 6, 9, 12 and 14.
(c) After a vibration test conducted in accordance with paragraph S8.8, there shall be no evidence of loose or broken parts, other than filaments, visible without magnification.
(d) The maximum wattage at 12.8 volts (design voltage): Single filament headlamp, 55 watts on the upper beam; dual filament headlamp, 43 watts on the upper beam and 65 watts on the lower beam.
S7.3.3 Type B headlighting system. A Type B headlighting system consists of two Type 2B1 headlamps and associated hardware, which are designed to conform to the following requirements:
(a) The requirements of paragraph S7.3.2 (a) through (c), except that the words “Figure 27–1 or Figure 27–2” are substituted for “Table 3” in paragraph S7.3.2(a)(3).
(b) The maximum wattage at 12.8 volts (design voltage): 70 watts on the upper beam and 60 watts on the lower beam.
S7.3.4 Type C headlighting system. A Type C headlighting system consists of two Type 1C1 and two Type 2C1 headlamps and associated hardware, which are designed to conform to the requirements of paragraph S7.3.2 (a) through (d), except that the words “Figure 28–1 or Figure 28–2” are substituted for “Table 3” in paragraph S7.3.2(a)(3).
S7.3.5 Type D headlighting system. (a) A Type D headlighting system consists of two Type 2D1 headlamps and associated hardware, which are designed to conform to the requirements of paragraph S7.3.2 (a) through (c), except that the words “Figure 27–1 or Figure 27–1” are substituted for “Table 3” in paragraph S7.3.2(a)(3).
(b) The maximum wattage at 12.8 volts (design voltage): 65 watts on upper beam, and 55 watts on lower beam.
S7.3.6 Type E headlighting system. (a) A Type E headlighting system consists of two Type 2E1 headlamps and associated hardware, which are designed to conform to the requirements of paragraph S7.3.2 (a) through (c), except that the words “Figure 27–1 or Figure 27–1” are substituted for “Table 3” in paragraph S7.3.2(a)(3).
(b) The maximum wattage at 12.8 volts (design voltage): 70 watts on upper beam, and 60 watts on lower beam.
S7.3.7 Type F headlighting system. A Type F headlighting system consists of two Type UF and two Type LF headlamps and associated hardware, which are designed to conform to the following requirements:
(a) Figures 11, 12, 13, and 14 as appropriate.
(b) The photometric requirements of Figure 15–1 or Figure 15–2 of this standard. A reaim tolerance of ±1/4degree is allowed for any test point on the Type LF lamp when tested alone, but is not allowed on the Type UF lamp when tested alone. For the test point 10U–90U, measurement shall be from the normally exposed surface of the lens face.
(c) SAE Standard J1383 APR85 Performance Requirements for Motor Vehicle Headlamps, Sections 2.4, 2.5, 2.6, 4.1, 4.1.4, and 5.1.4.
(d) When tested in accordance with section (c), the mounted assembly (either Type UF or Type LF headlamps, respective mounting ring, aiming ring, and aim adjustment mechanism) shall be designed to conform to the requirements of Figure 15–1 or Figure 15–2 for upper or lower beams respectively without reaim when any conforming Type UF or LF headlamp is tested and replaced by another conforming headlamp of the same Type.
(e) SAE J580 DEC86 Sealed Beam Headlamp Assembly with the following exceptions:
(1) Section 2.2 Mounting Ring reads: “the adjustable ring upon which the sealed beam unit is mounted and which forces the sealed beam unit to seat against the aiming ring when assembled into a sealed beam assembly.”
(2) The definition “2.3 Aiming Ring” reads: “The clamping ring that retains the sealed beam unit against the mounting ring, and that provides an interface between the unit's aiming/seating pads and the headlamp aimer adapter (locating plate).”
(3) Section 4.1.1 Vibration Test does not apply.
(4) Sections 5.1.1.1 and 5.1.2.3 do not apply.
(5) Section 5.1.2.1 reads: “When the headlamp assembly is tested in the laboratory, a minimum aiming adjustment of ±2.5 degrees shall be provided in the horizontal plane and ±4 degrees in the vertical plane.”
(6) Section 5.1.2.2 concludes: “ * * * through an angle of ±2.5 degrees and ±4 degrees respectively.”
(7) Section 5.1.6 is retitled “Retaining Ring/Aiming Ring Tests”. The phrase “92×150 mm * * * 0.340 in (8.6 mm)” is added at the end of the table for flange thickness. The sentence beginning “The fastening means” is deleted.
(8) Figures 2, 3, and 4 do not apply, and the reference to them in section 4.5 is replaced by “Figure 16, Deflectometer, of Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 108.”
(f) A lens for a Type F headlamp incorporating an upper beam shall be labeled “UF.” A lens for a Type F headlamp incorporating a lower beam shall be labeled “LF”. The face of letters, numbers, or other symbols molded on the surface of the lens shall not be raised more than 0.020 in (0.5 mm), and shall be placed no closer to the geometric center of the lens than 1.375 in. (35 mm). The marking shall be molded in the lens and shall be not less than1/4in. (6.35 mm) in size.
(g) The maximum wattage at 12.8 volts (design voltage): 70 watts on the upper beam and 60 watts on the lower beam.
(h) Type F headlamps may be mounted on common or parallel seating and aiming planes to permit simultaneous aiming of both headlamps provided that when tested with any conforming Type UF and LF headlamps according to Section S10:
(1) The assembly (consisting of the Type UF and LF headlamps, mounting rings, the aiming/seating rings, and aim adjustment mechanism) shall be designed to conform to the test points of Figure 15–1 or Figure 15–2.
(2) There shall be no provision for adjustment between the common or parallel aiming and seating planes of the two lamps.
(i) After a vibration test conducted in accordance with paragraph S8.8, the Type F system shall show no evidence of loose or broken parts, other than filaments, visible without magnification.
S7.3.8 Type G headlighting system. A Type G headlamp system consists of two Type 1G1 headlamps and two Type 2G1 headlamps each of which is designed to conform to the following requirements:
(a) Figures 18 and 21.
(b) SAE Standard J1383 APR85 Performance Requirements for Motor Vehicle Headlamps (except paragraphs 1, 2.1.2, 2.8.2,3, 4.1.1, 4.1.2, 4.1.3, 4.4, 4.6, 4.8 through 4.18, 5.1.1, 5.1.3, 5.1.5 through 5.1.16, 5.2.2, 5.3.5 through 6.4). In paragraph 5.3.2 the words “and retaining rings” are omitted. In paragraph 4.5.2, the words “either Figure 28–1, or Figure 28–2” are substituted for “Table 3”.
(c) SAE Standard J580 DEC86 Sealed Beam Headlamp Assembly, with the following exceptions:
(1) Sections 2.2, 2.3, 4.1.1, 5.1.1.1, 5.1.2.3, 5.1.6, and 5.2.1.
(2) Section 4.5 reads: “ Torque Deflection Test. The headlamp assembly to be tested shall be mounted in the designed vehicle position and set at nominal aim (0.0). A special adapter (Figure 22) for the deflectometer (Figure 16) shall be clamped onto the headlamp assembly. A torque of 20 in.-lbs (2.25 N-m) shall be applied to the headlamp assembly through the deflectometer, and a reading on the thumb wheel shall be taken. The torque shall be removed and a second reading on the thumb wheel shall be taken.”
(d) After a vibration test conducted in accordance with paragraph S8.8, there shall be no evidence of loose or broken parts, other than filaments, visible without magnification.
(e) The maximum wattage at 12.8 volts (design voltage) for the 1G1 and 2G1 upper beam is 55 watts and 43 watts respectively; for the 2G1 lower beam, 65 watts.
(f) A lens for a Type G headlamp incorporating only part of an upper beam shall be labeled “1G1.” A lens for a Type G headlamp incorporating both part of an upper beam and a lower beam shall be labeled “2G1.” The face of letters, numbers, or other symbols molded on the surface of the lens shall not be raised more than 0.020 in. (0.5 mm.), and shall be placed no closer to the geometric center of the lens than 1.375 in. (35 mm). The marking shall be molded in the lens and shall be not less than1/4in. (6.35 mm) in size.
S7.3.9 Type H headlighting system. A Type H headlamp system consisting of two Type 2H1 headlamps and associated hardware, which are designed to conform to the following requirements:
(a) Paragraphs S7.3.8 (a) through (d) except that in paragraph S7.3.8(b), the words “Figure 27–1 or Figure 27–2” are substituted for “Table 3.”
(b) The maximum wattage at 12.8 volts (design voltage): 70 watts on the upper beam and 60 watts on the lower beam.
(c) A lens for a Type H headlamp incorporating both an upper beam and a lower beam shall be labeled “2H1.” The face of letters, numbers, or other symbols molded on the surface of the lens shall not be raised more than 0.020 in. (0.5 mm), and shall be placed no closer to the geometric center of the lens than 1.375 in. (35 mm). The marking shall be molded in the lens and shall be not less than1/4in. (6.35 mm) in size.
S7.4 Integral Beam Headlighting System. An integral beam headlighting system shall be designed to conform to the following requirements:
(a) The system shall provide in total not more than two upper beams and two lower beams of the performance described in one of the following:
(1) In a four-headlamp system, each upper beam headlamp and each lower beam headlamp shall be designed to conform to the photometrics of one of the following:
(i) Figure 15–1 or Figure 15–2; or
(ii) Figure 15–1 or Figure 15–2, except that the upper beam test value at 2.5 D-V and 2.5D–12R and 12L, shall apply to the lower beam headlamp and not to the upper beam headlamp, and the upper beam test point value at 1.5D–9R and 9L shall be 1000; or
(iii) Figure 28–1 or Figure 28–2.
(2) In a two-headlamp system, each headlamp shall be designed to conform to the photometrics of one of the following:
(i) Figure 17–1 or Figure 17–2; or
(ii) Figure 27–1 or Figure 27–2.
(3) In a system in which there is more than one beam contributor providing a lower beam, and/or more than one beam contributor providing an upper beam, each beam contributor in the system shall be designed to meet only the photometric performance requirements of Figure 15–1 or Figure 15–2 based upon the following mathematical expression: conforming test point value = 2 (Figure 15–1 or Figure 15–2 test point value)/total number of lower or upper beam contributors for the vehicle, as appropriate. The system shall be designed to use the Vehicle Headlamp Aiming Device (VHAD) as specified in paragraph S7.8.5.2.
(b) The lower and upper beams shall be provided only as follows where each headlamp contains two light sources:
(1) The lower beam shall be provided either by the most outboard light source (or the uppermost if arranged vertically), or by all light sources.
(2) The upper beam shall be provided either by the most inboard light source (or the lowermost if arranged vertically), or by all light sources.
(c) The lower and upper beams shall be provided only as follows where each headlamp contains a single light source:
(1) The lower beam shall be provided by the most outboard headlamps (or the uppermost if arranged vertically), and the lens of each such headlamp shall be permanently marked with the letter “L.”
(2) The upper beam shall be provided by the most inboard headlamps (or lowermost if arranged vertically), and the lens of each such headlamp shall be permanently marked with the letter “U.”
(d) A headlamp or beam contributor designed to meet paragraphs (a)(1) or (a)(3) of this section and S7.8.5.1 may be mounted in an assembly to permit simultaneous aiming of the beam(s) contributors, provided that with any complying contributor the assembly complete with all lamps meets the appropriate photometric requirements when tested in accordance with S10.
(e) Each integral beam headlamp system shall be designed to conform to the applicable photometric performance requirements in paragraph (a) of this section when tested in accordance with sections 4.1 and 4.1.4 of SAE Standard J1383 APR85 with any headlamps intended for use in such system. The term “aiming plane” means “aiming reference plane,” or an appropriate vertical plane defined by the manufacturer as required in paragraph S7.8.1.
(f) The system shall be aimable in accordance with the requirements of paragraph S7.8. A system that incorporates any headlamp or beam contributor that does not have a VHAD as an integral and indivisible part of the headlamp or beam contributor shall be designed so that the appropriate photometrics are met when any correctly aimed and photometrically conforming headlamp or beam contributor is removed from its mounting and aiming mechanism, and is replaced without reaim by any conforming headlamp or beam contributor of the same type.
(g) A headlamp with a glass lens need not meet the abrasion resistance test (S8.2). A headlamp with a nonreplaceable glass lens need not meet the chemical resistance test (S8.3). A headlamp with a glass lens and a non-plastic reflector need not meet the internal heat test of paragraph S8.6.2. A headlamp of sealed design as verified in paragraph S8.9 (sealing) need not meet the corrosion (S8.4), dust (S8.5), or humidity (S8.7) tests; however, the headlamp shall meet the requirements of paragraphs 4.1, 4.1.2, 4.4 and 5.1.4 for corrosion and connector of SAE Standard J580 DEC86 Sealed Beam Headlamp Assembly. An integral beam headlamp may incorporate light sources that are replaceable and are used for purposes other than headlighting.
(h) When tested according to any of the procedures indicated in subparagraphs (1) through (7) each headlamp or beam contributor shall meet the appropriate requirement:
(1) After an abrasion test conducted in accordance with paragraph S8.2, the headlamp shall meet the photometric requirements applicable to the headlamp system under test.
(2) After the chemical resistance tests of paragraphs S8.3 and S8.10.1, the headlamp shall have no surface deterioration, coating delamination, fractures, deterioration of bonding or sealing materials, color bleeding or color pickup visible without magnification, and the headlamp shall meet the photometric requirements applicable to the headlamp system under test.
(3) After a corrosion test conducted in accordance with paragraph S8.4, there shall be no evidence of external or internal corrosion or rust visible without magnification. After a corrosion test conducted in accordance with paragraph S8.10.2, there shall be no evidence of corrosion or rust visible without magnification on any part of the headlamp reflector that receives light from a headlamp light source, on any metal light or heat shield assembly, or on a metal reflector of any other lamp not sealed from the headlamp reflector. Loss of adhesion of any applied coating shall not occur more than 0.l25 in. (3.2 mm) from any sharp edge on the inside or outside. Corrosion may occur on terminals only if the current produced during the test of paragraph S8.4(c) is not less than 9.7 amperes.
(4) After a dust test conducted in accordance with paragraph S8.5, the headlamp shall meet the photometric requirements applicable to the headlamp system under test.
(5) The headlamp shall first meet the requirements of subparagraph (i) and then those of subparagraph (ii).
(i) After a temperature cycle test conducted in accordance with paragraph S8.6.1, the headlamp shall show no evidence of delamination, fractures, entry of moisture or deterioration of bonding material, color bleeding, warpage or deformation visible without magnification or lens warpage greater than .118 in. (3 mm) when measured parallel to the optical axis at the point of intersection of the axis of each light source with the exterior surface of the lens, and it shall meet the photometric requirements applicable to the headlamp system under test.
(ii) After an internal heat test conducted in accordance with paragraph S8.6.2, there shall be no lens warpage greater than .118 in. (3 mm) when measured parallel to the optical axis at the point of intersection of the axis of each light source with the exterior surface of the lens, and it shall meet the photometric requirements applicable to the headlamp system under test.
(6) After a humidity test conducted in accordance with paragraph S8.7, the inside of the headlamp shall show no evidence of delamination or moisture, fogging or condensation visible without magnification.
(7) After a vibration test conducted in accordance with paragraph S8.8, there shall be no evidence of loose or broken parts, other than filaments, visible without magnification.
(i) An integral beam headlamp may incorporate replaceable light sources that are used for purposes other than headlighting.
S7.5 Replaceable bulb headlamp system. Each replaceable bulb headlamp system shall be designed to conform to the following requirements:
(a) The system shall provide only two lower beams and two upper beams and shall incorporate not more than two replaceable light sources in each headlamp.
(b) The photometrics as specified in subparagraphs (c) through (e) of this paragraph (depicted in Figure 26), using any light source of the Type intended for use in such system.
(c) The test requirements of sections 4.1, 4.1.4, and performance requirements of section 5.1.4 of SAE J1383 APR85, using the photometric requirements specified in subparagraphs (d) and (e) of this paragraph.
(d) For a headlamp equipped with dual filament replaceable light sources, the following requirements apply:
(1) Headlamps designed to conform to the external aiming requirements of S7.8.5.1 shall have no mechanism that allows adjustment of an individual light source, or, if there are two light sources, independent adjustments of each reflector.
(2) The lower and upper beams of a headlamp system consisting of two lamps, each containing either one or two replaceable light sources, shall be provided as follows:
(i) The lower beam shall be provided in one of the following ways:
(A) By the outboard light source (or upper one if arranged vertically) designed to conform to:
( 1 ) The lower beam requirements of Figure 27–1 or Figure 27–2, or Figure 17–1 or Figure 17–2, if the light sources in the headlamp system are any combination of dual filament replaceable light sources other than Type HB2; or
( 2 ) The lower beam requirements of Figure 17–1 or Figure17–2 if the light sources are Type HB2, or any dual filament replaceable light sources that include Type HB2; or
(B) By both light sources in the headlamp, designed to conform to the lower beam requirements specified above.
(ii) The upper beam shall be provided in one of the following ways:
(A) By the inboard light source (or the lower one if arranged vertically) designed to conform to:
( 1 ) The upper beam requirements of Figure 27–1 or Figure 27–2, or Figure 17–1 or Figure 17–2 if the light sources in the headlamp system are any combination of dual filament replaceable light sources that include Type HB2, or
( 2 ) The upper beam requirements of figure 17–1 or Figure 17–2 if the light sources are type HB2, or any combination of replaceable light sources that include Type HB2; or
(B) By both light sources in the headlamp, designed to conform to the upper beam requirements specified above.
(3) The lower and upper beams of a headlamp system consisting of four lamps, each containing a single replaceable light source, shall be provided as follows:
(i) The lower beam shall be provided by the outboard lamp (or the upper one if arranged vertically), designed to conform to:
(A) The lower beam requirements of Figure 27–1 or Figure 27–2, or Figure 15–1 or Figure 15–2 if the light sources in the headlamp system are any combination of dual filament light sources other than Type HB2; or
(B) The lower beam requirements of Figure 15–1 or Figure 15–2 if the light sources are Type HB2, or dual filament light sources other than Type HB1 and HB5. The lens of each such headlamp shall be marked with the letter “L”.
(ii) The upper beam shall be provided by the inboard lamp (or the lower one if arranged vertically), designed to conform to:
(A) The upper beam requirements of Figure 27–1 or Figure 27–2, of Figure 15–1 or Figure 15–2 if the light sources in the headlamp system are any combination of dual filament light sources other than Type HB2; or
(B) The upper beam requirements of Figure 15–1 or Figure 15–2 if the light sources are Type HB2, or dual filament light sources other tha Type HB1 and Type HB5. The lens of each such headlamp shall be marked with the letter “u”.
(e) The following requirements apply to a headlamp system equipped with any combination of replaceable light sources except those specified in paragraph (d) of this section:
(1) Headlamps designed to conform to the external aim requirements of S7.8.5.1 shall have no mechanism that allows adjustment of an individual light source, or, if there are two replaceable light sources, independent adjustment of each reflector.
(2) The lower and upper beams of a headlamp system consisting of two lamps, each containing a combination of two replaceable light sources (other than those combinations specified in subparagraph (d) of this paragraph) shall be provided only as follows:
(i) The lower beam shall be provided in one of the following ways:
(A) By the outboard light source (or the uppermost if arranged vertically) designed to conform to the lower beam requirements of Figure 17–1 or Figure 17–2; or
(B) By both light sources, designed to conform to the lower beam requirements of Figure 17–1 or Figure 17–2.
(ii) The upper beam shall be provided in one of the following ways:
(A) By the inboard light source (or the lower one if arranged vertically) designed to conform to the upper beam requirements of Figure 17–1 or Figure 17–2; or
(B) By both light sources, designed to conform to the upper beam requirements of Figure 17–1 or Figure 17–2.
(3) The lower and upper beams of a headlamp system consisting of four lamps, using any combination of replaceable light sources except those specified in subparagraph (d) of this paragraph, each lamp containing only a single replaceable light source, shall be provided only as follows:
(i) The lower beam shall be produced by the outboard lamp (or upper one if arranged vertically), designed to conform to the lower beam requirements of Figure 15–1 or Figure 15–2. The lens of each headlamp shall be permanently marked with the letter “L”.
(ii) The upper beam shall be produced by the inboard lamp (or lower one of arranged vertically), designed to conform to the upper beam requirements of Figure 15–1 or Figure 15–2. The lens of each headlamp shall be permanently marked with the letter “U”.
(f) Each lens reflector unit manufactured as replacement equipment shall be designed to conform to the requirements of subparagraphs (d) and (e) of this paragraph when any replaceable light source appropriate for such unit is inserted in it.
(g) The lens of each replaceable bulb headlamp shall bear permanent marking in front of each replaceable light source with which it is equipped that states the HB Type, if the light source is designed to conform to subparagraphs (a) through (e) of paragraph S7.7, or the bulb marking/ designation provided in compliance with Section VIII of appendix A of part 564, if the light source is designed to conform to subparagraph (g) of paragraph S.7.7 No marking need be provided if the only replaceable light source in the headlamp is Type HB1.
(h) The system shall be aimable in accordance with paragraph S7.8.
(i) Each headlamp shall meet the requirements of paragraphs S7.4(g) and (h), except that the sentence in paragraph (g) to verify sealing according to section S8.9 Sealing does not apply.
(j) A replaceable bulb headlighting system may incorporate replaceable light sources that are used for purposes other than headlighting.
S7.6 Combination Headlighting System. A combination headlighting system shall be comprised of either two headlamps designed to conform to the requirements of S7.6.2, or any combination of four headlamps designed to conform to the requirements of S7.3.7, S7.4, or S7.5 of this standard.
S7.6.1 A combination headlighting system shall provide in total not more than two upper beams and two lower beams. When installed on a motor vehicle, the headlamps (or parts thereof) that provide the lower beam shall be of the same type, and provide a symmetrical effective projected luminous lens area when illuminated.
S7.6.2 In a combination headlighting system consisting of two headlamps, each headlamp shall be designed to conform to Figure 17–1 or Figure 17–2 and shall be a combination of two different headlamps chosen from the following types: a Type F headlamp, an integral beam headlamp, and a replaceable bulb headlamp.
S7.6.2.1 That part of the headlamp which contains an integral beam headlamp, or beam contributors used in place of a single headlamp, shall be designed to conform to the requirements of S7.4 (c) through (h) of this standard.
S7.6.2.2 That part of the headlamp which contains a replaceable bulb headlamp shall be designed to conform to the requirements of S7.5 of this standard.
S7.6.3 In a combination headlighting system consisting of four headlamps, each headlamp shall be designed to conform to Figure 15–1 or Figure 15–2, or if an integral beam headlamp in which there is more than one beam contributor, designed to conform to Figure 15–1 or Figure 15–2 in the manner required by S7.4(a)(3) of this standard.
S7.7 Replaceable light sources. Each replaceable light source shall be designed to conform to the dimensions and electrical specifications furnished with respect to it pursuant to part 564 of this chapter, and shall conform to the following requirements:
(a) If other than an HB Type, the light source shall be marked with the bulb marking designation specified for it in compliance with appendix A or appendix B of part 564 of this chapter. The base of each HB Type shall be marked with its HB Type designation. Each replaceable light source shall also be marked with the symbol DOT and with a name or trademark in accordance with paragraph S7.2.
(b) The measurement of maximum power and luminous flux that is submitted in compliance with appendix A or appendix B of part 564 of this chapter shall be made in accordance with this paragraph. The filament or discharge arc shall be seasoned before measurement of either. Measurement shall be made with the direct current test voltage regulated within one quarter of one percent. The test voltage shall be 12.8v. The measurement of luminous flux shall be in accordance with the Illuminating Engineering Society of North America, LM–45, IES Approved Method for Electrical and Photometric Measurements of General Service Incandescent Filament Lamps (April 1980); shall be made with the black cap installed on Type HB1, Type HB2, Type HB4, and Type HB5, and on any other replaceable light source so designed; and shall be made with the electrical conductor and light source base shrouded with an opaque white cover, except for the portion normally located within the interior of the lamp housing. The measurement of luminous flux for the Types HB3 and HB4 shall be made with the base covered with a white cover as shown in the drawings for Types HB3 and HB4 filed in Docket No. NHTSA 98–3397. (The white cover is used to eliminate the likelihood of incorrect lumen measurement that will occur should the reflectance of the light source base and electrical connector be low).
(c) The capsule, lead wires and/or terminals, and seal on each Type HB1, Type HB3, Type HB4, and Type HB5 light source, and on any other replaceable light source which uses a seal, shall be installed in a pressure chamber as shown in Figure 25 so as to provide an airtight seal. The diameter of the aperture in Figure 25 on a replaceable light source (other than an HB Type) shall be that dimension furnished for such light source in compliance with appendix A or appendix B of part 564 of this chapter. An airtight seal exists when no air bubbles appear on the low pressure (connector) side after the light source has been immersed in water for one minute while inserted in a cylindrical aperture specified for the light source, and subjected to an air pressure of 70kPa (10 P.S.I.G.) on the glass capsule side.
(d) The measurement of maximum power and luminous flux that is submitted in compliance with section VII of appendix A of part 564 of this chapter, or section IV of appendix B of part 564 of this chapter, shall be made with the direct current test voltage regulated within one quarter of one percent. The test voltage shall be 12.8v. The measurement of luminous flux shall be in accordance with the Illuminating Engineering Society of North America, LM 45; IES Approved Method for Electrical and Photometric Measurements of General Service Incandescent Filament Lamps (April 1980). The filament of a replaceable light source shall be seasoned before such measurement. The white covers are used to eliminate the likelihood of incorrect lumens measurement that will occur should the reflectance of the light source base and electrical connector be low.
(1) For a light source with a resistive element type filament, seasoning of the light source shall be made in accordance with section 2.9 of SAE Standard J1383 APR85 Performance Requirements for Motor Vehicle Headlamps. The measurement of luminous flux shall be made with the black cap installed on Type HB1, Type HB2, Type HB4, and Type HB5 light sources, and on any other replaceable light source so designed, and shall be made with the electrical conductor and light source base shrouded with an opaque white colored cover, except for the portion normally located within the interior of the lamp housing. The measurement of luminous flux for Type HB3 and Type HB4 shall be made with the base covered with the white cover shown in the drawings for Types HB3 and HB4 filed in Docket No. NHTSA 98–3397.
(2) For a light source using excited gas mixtures as a filament or discharge arc, seasoning of the light source system, including any ballast required for its operation, shall be made in accordance with section 4.0 of SAE Recommended Practice J2009 FEB93 Discharge Forward Lighting Systems. With the test voltage applied to the ballast input terminals, the measurement of luminous flux shall be made with the black cap installed, if so designed, and shall be made with an opaque white colored cover, except for the portion normally located within the interior of the lamp housing.
(e) If a ballast is required for operation, each ballast shall bear the following permanent markings:
(1) Name or logo of ballast manufacturer;
(2) Ballast part number or unique identification;
(3) Part number or other unique identification of the light source for which the ballast is designed;
(4) Rated laboratory life of the light source/ballast combination, if the information for the light source has been filed in appendix B of part 564 of this chapter;
(5) A warning that ballast output voltage presents the potential for severe electrical shock that could lead to permanent injury or death;
(6) Ballast output power in watts and output voltage in rms volts AC or DC; and
(7) The symbol ‘DOT’.”
(f) For light sources that use excited gas mixtures as a filament or discharge arc, the “rated laboratory life” shall be determined in accordance with sections 4.3 and 4.9 of SAE Recommended Practice J2009 FEB93 Forward Discharge Lighting Systems.
(g) After the force deflection test conducted in accordance with S9, the permanent deflection of the glass envelope shall not exceed 0.13 mm in the direction of the applied force.
S7.8 Aimability Performance Requirements.
S7.8.1 (a) Each headlamp or beam contributor that is not visually/optically aimable in accordance with S7.8.5.3 of this standard shall be equipped with fiducial marks, aiming pads, or similar references of sufficient detail and accuracy, for determination of an appropriate vehicle plane to be used with the photometric procedures of SAE J1383 APR85 for correct alignment with the photometer axis when being tested for photometric compliance, and to serve for the aiming reference when the headlamp or beam contributor is installed on a motor vehicle. The fiducial marks, aiming pads, or similar references are protrusions, bubble vials, holes, indentations, ridges, scribed lines, or other readily identifiable marks established and described by the vehicle or headlamp manufacturer.
(b) Each motor vehicle manufactured on and after September 1, 1998, shall be equipped with headlamps or beam contributors which have a mark or markings that are visible from the front of the headlamp when installed on the vehicle to identify the optical axis of the headlamp to assure proper horizontal and vertical alignment of the aiming screen or optical aiming equipment. The manufacturer is free to choose the design of the mark or markings. The mark or markings may be on the interior or exterior of the lens or indicated by a mark or central structure on the interior or exterior of the headlamp.
(c) Each headlamp that is visually/optically aimable in accordance with S7.8.5.3 of this standard shall be marked in accordance with S7.8.5.3(f).
S7.8.2 Except as provided in this paragraph, each headlamp shall be installed on a motor vehicle with a mounting and aiming mechanism that allows aim inspection and adjustment of both vertical and horizontal aim, and is accessible for those purposes without removal of any vehicle parts, except for protective covers removable without the use of tools.
S7.8.2.1 (a) When installed on the vehicle, adjustment of one aim axis through its full on-vehicle range shall not cause the aim of the other axis to deviate more than ±0.76 degree.
(b) If the performance specified in paragraph (a) of this section is not achievable, the requirements of S7.8.5.2(b)(3) apply, except that if the aiming mechanism is not a VHAD, the requirements specific to VHADs are not applicable, and the instruction shall be specific to the aiming mechanism installed.
(c) A visually/optically aimable headlamp that has a lower beam shall not have a horizontal adjustment mechanism unless such mechanism meets the requirements of paragraph S7.8.5.2 of this standard.
S7.8.2.2 If the headlamp is aimed by moving the reflector relative to the lens and headlamp housing, or vice versa, it shall:
(a) Allow movement of the headlamp system, when tested in the laboratory, to be not less than the full range of pitch on the vehicle on which the headlamp system is installed and for the horizontal aim range limits of S7.8.4,
(b) Conform with the photometrics applicable to it with the lens at any position relative to the reflector within the range limits as specified in S7.8.2.2(a),
(c) Be exempted from the aim range limits for testing in a laboratory in S7.8.3, and
(d) Be exempted from S7.8.4 if it is visually/optically aimable and has fixed horizontal aim.
S7.8.3 When a headlamp system is tested in a laboratory, the range of its vertical aim shall not be less than ±4 degrees from the nominal correct aim position for the intended vehicle application. When installed on a motor vehicle, the range of vertical aim shall be not less than the full range of pitch of the vehicle on which the headlamp system is installed. The installed range of static pitch angle shall as a minimum be determined from unloaded vehicle weight to gross vehicle weight rating, and incorporate pitch angle effects from maximum trailer or trunk loadings, the full range of tire intermix sizes and suspensions recommended and/or installed by the vehicle manufacturer, and the anticipated effects of variable passenger loading. The vertical aim adjustment mechanism shall be continuously adjustable over the full range.
S7.8.4 When a headlamp system is tested in a laboratory, the range of its horizontal aim shall be not less that ±2.5 degrees from the nominal correct aim position for the intended vehicle application.
S7.8.5 When activated in a steady-burning state, headlamps shall not have any styling ornament or other feature, such as a translucent cover or grill, in front of the lens. Headlamp wipers may be used in front of the lens provided that the headlamp system is designed to conform with all applicable photometric requirements with the wiper stopped in any position in front of the lens. When a headlamp system is installed on a motor vehicle, it shall be aimable with at least one of the following: An externally applied aiming device, as specified in S7.8.5.1; an on-vehicle headlamp aiming device installed by the vehicle or lamp manufacturer, as specified in S7.8.5.2; or by visual/optical means, as specified in S7.8.5.3.
S7.8.5.1 External aiming. Each headlamp system that is capable of being mechanically aimed by externally applied headlamp aiming devices shall be mechanically aimable using the equipment specified in SAE Standard J602 OCT80 Headlamp Aiming Device for Mechanically Aimable Sealed Beam Headlamp Units without the removal of any ornamental trim rings, covers, wipers or other vehicle parts.
(a) The aim of the headlamps in each headlamp system, other than a headlamp system designed to conform to section S7.3, that is designed to use such external aiming devices, shall not deviate more than 0.30 degree when a downward torque of 20 lb.-in. (2.25 N-m) is removed from the headlamp in its design operating position. The downward force used to create the torque shall be applied parallel to the aiming reference plane, through the aiming pads, and displaced forward using a lever arm such that the force is applied on an axis that is perpendicular to the aiming reference plane and originates at the center of the aiming pad pattern (see Figures 4–1 and 4–3). For headlamps using the aiming pad locations of Group 1, the distance between the point of application of force and the aiming reference plane shall be not less than 6.625 in. (168.3 mm) plus the distance from the aiming reference plane to the secondary plane, if used (see section S7.8.5.1(d)(1)). For headlamps using the aiming pad locations of Group II, the distance between the point of application of force and the aiming reference plane shall be not less than 6.609 in. (167.9 mm) plus the distance from the aiming reference plane to the secondary plane, if used. For headlamps using the nonadjustable Headlamp Aiming Device Locating Plates for the 146 mm diameter, the 176 mm diameter, and the 92×150 mm sealed beam units, the distance between the point of application of force and the aiming plane shall, respectively, be not less than 6.984 in. (177.4 mm), 6.937 in. (176.2 mm), and 7.625 in (193.7 mm). Each headlamp system that is designed to conform to paragraph S7.5 and that is designed to use such external aiming devices, and which is manufactured on or after September 1, 1990, shall comply with this paragraph.
(b) When a headlamp is installed on a motor vehicle, its aim in any direction shall not change by more than 0.30 degree nor shall the lamp recede more than 0.1 in. (2.5 mm.) after being subjected to an inward force of 50 pounds (222 newtons) applied evenly to the lens parallel to the mechanical axis.
(c) Each headlamp system mounting and aiming mechanism shall be subjected to a salt spray (fog) test in accordance with ASTM B117–73 Method of Salt Spray (Fog) Testing for a period of 50 hours, consisting of two successive 25-hour periods of 24 hours exposure followed by 1 hour of drying. At the end of 50 hours, the headlamp system shall be capable of meeting any of the applicable requirements of paragraph S7.8.
(d) Each headlamp system which is designed to use the Headlamp Aiming Device Locating Plates with adjustable legs for the 100 × 165 mm unit and the 142 × 200 mm unit, and which has adjustable length legs, shall meet the requirements of subparagraphs (1) and (2) below.
(1) The lens shall have three aiming pads which meet the requirements of Figure 4, Dimensional Specifications for Location of Aiming Pads on Replaceable Bulb Headlamp Units. The aiming pads need not be centered at the geometric center of the lens, or on the optical axis. Except as provided in subparagraph (2), a whole number, which represents the distance in tenths of an inch (i.e. 0.3 inch=3) from the aiming reference plane to the respective aiming pads which are not in contact with that plane, shall be inscribed adjacent to each respective aiming pad on the lens. The height of these numbers shall be not less than .157 inch (4 mm). If there is interference between the plane and the area of the lens between the aiming pads, the whole number represents the distance to a secondary plane. The secondary plane shall be located parallel to the aiming reference plane and as close to the lens as possible without causing interference.
(2) If the most forward aiming pad is the lower inboard aiming pad, then the dimensions may be placed anywhere on the lens. The dimension for the outboard aiming pad (Dimension F in Figure 4) shall be followed by the letter “H” and the dimension for the center aiming pad shall be followed by the letter “V.” The dimensions shall be expressed in tenths of an inch.
(e) Each headlamp may be designed to use the nonadjustable Headlamp Aiming Device Locating Plate for the 100×165 mm unit, the 142×200 mm unit, the 146 mm diameter unit, or the 178 mm diameter unit of SAE J602, or the 92×150 mm Type F unit, and incorporate lens-mounted aiming pads as specified for those units in Figures 10, 13, 5, or 7 respectively in SAE J1383 APR85, or Figure 11 of this standard for the Type F unit. If so designed, no additional lens marking is necessary to designate the type of plate or dimensions.
S7.8.5.2 On-vehicle aiming. Each headlamp system that is capable of being aimed by equipment installed on the vehicle shall include a Vehicle Headlamp Aiming Device (VHAD) that conforms to the following requirements:
(a) Aim. The VHAD shall provide for headlamp aim inspection and adjustment in both the vertical and horizontal axes.
(1) Vertical aim. The VHAD shall include the necessary references and scales relative to the horizontal plane to assure correct vertical aim for photometry and aiming purposes. An off-vehicle measurement of the angle of the plane of the ground is permitted. In addition, an equal number of graduations from the “O” position representing angular changes in the axis in the upward and downward directions shall be provided.
(i) Each graduation shall represent a change in the vertical position of the mechanical axis not larger than 0.19 degree (1 in. at 25 ft.) to provide for variations in aim at least 1.2 degrees above and below the horizontal, and have an accuracy relative to the zero mark of less than 0.1 degree.
(ii) The VHAD shall be marked to indicate headlamp aim movement in the upward and downward directions.
(iii) Each graduation shall indicate a linear movement of the scale indicator of not less than 0.05 in. (1.27 mm) if a direct reading analog indicator is used. If a remote reading indicator is provided, it shall represent the actual aim movement in a clear, understandable format.
(iv) The vertical indicator shall perform through a minimum range of ±1.2 degrees.
(v) Means shall be provided in the VHAD for compensating for deviations in floor slope less than 1.2 degrees from the horizontal that would affect the correct positioning of the headlamp for vertical aim.
(vi) The graduations shall be legible under an illumination level not greater than 30 foot candles, measured at the top of the graduation, by an observer having 20/20 vision (Snellen), and shall permit aim adjustment to within 0.19 degree (1 in. at 25 ft.).
(2) Horizontal aim. The VHAD shall include references and scales relative to the longitudinal axis of the vehicle necessary to assure correct horizontal aim for photometry and aiming purposes. An “O” mark shall be used to indicate alignment of the headlamps relative to the longitudinal axis of the vehicle. In addition, an equal number of graduations from the “O” position representing equal angular changes in the axis relative to the vehicle axis shall be provided.
(i) Each graduation shall represent a change in the horizontal position of the mechanical axis not greater than 0.38 degree (2 in. at 25 ft.) to provide for variations in aim at least 0.76 degree (4 in. at 25 ft.) to the left and right of the longitudinal axis of the vehicle, and shall have an accuracy relative to the zero mark of less than 0.1 degree.
(ii) The VHAD shall be marked to indicate headlamp aim movement in the left and right directions.
(iii) The graduations shall be legible under an illumination level not greater than 30 foot candles, measured at the top of the graduation, by an observer having 20/20 vision (Snellen), and shall permit aim adjustment to within 0.38 degree (2 in. at 25 ft.).
(iv) The horizontal indicator shall perform through a minimum range of ±0.76 degree (4 in. at 25 ft.); however, the indicator itself shall be capable of recalibration over a movement of ±2.5 degrees relative to the longitudinal axis of the vehicle to accommodate any adjustment necessary for recalibrating the indicator after vehicle repair from accident damage.
(b) Aiming instructions. (1) The instructions for properly aiming the headlighting system using the VHAD shall be provided on a label permanently affixed to the vehicle adjacent to the VHAD, or in the vehicle operator's manual. The instructions shall advise that the headlighting system is properly aimed if the appropriate vertical plane (as defined by the vehicle manufacturer) is perpendicular to both the longitudinal axis of the vehicle, and a horizontal plane when the vehicle is on a horizontal surface, and the VHAD is set at “O” vertical and “O” horizontal.
(2) Should a remote indicator or a remote indicator and adjuster be provided, the instructions shall be placed in the operator's manual, and may also be placed on a label adjacent to the VHAD.
(3) Should the mechanism not meet the requirements of S7.8.2.1, on each motor vehicle manufactured on or after September 1, 1990, a cautionary label shall be placed adjacent to the mechanism stating the caution and including either the reason for the caution or the corrective action necessary. Each such label shall also refer the reader to the vehicle operator's manual for complete instructions. Each such vehicle shall be equipped with an operator's manual containing the complete instructions appropriate for the mechanism installed.
(c) Each headlamp equipped with a VHAD that is manufactured for use on motor vehicles manufactured on or after September 1, 1998, shall be manufactured with its calibration permanently fixed by its manufacturer. Calibration in this case means the process of accurately aligning the geometry of the VHAD devices with the beam pattern for the purposes of compliance with the standard.
(d) Testing the VHAD. (1) The headlamp assembly (the headlamp(s), and the VHAD(s)) shall be mounted on a level goniometer, aligned to a photometer located not less than 60 ft. (18.3 m) from the VHAD assembly. The assembly shall be mechanically aimed using the VHAD in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions as provided with the vehicle on which the VHAD is intended to be used. A1/4degree reaim is permitted in any direction at any test point to allow for variations in readings between laboratories. The test shall be conducted in accordance with the procedures of paragraphs 4.1 and 4.1.4 of SAE J1383 APR85. Under these conditions the mounted headlamp assembly shall be designed to conform to the photometric requirements appropriate for the headlamp system under test.
(2) When tested in accordance with subsection (1) of this section, with any replacement headlamp unit(s) or light sources intended for use in the system under test, the VHAD and headlamp system shall be designed to conform to the photometric performance requirements appropriate for the system under test.
(3) The same VHAD and associated headlamp(s) (or headlamp assembly) shall be rigidly mounted in a headlamp test fixture and comply with the following laboratory test procedures:
(i) Each graduation on the horizontal and vertical aim scales shall be checked and any variation from the correct aim shall not exceed ±0.2 degree, and ±0.1 degree respectively.
(ii) With the aiming plane horizontal and vertical and with the scale on the device set at 0, the aimer shall be adjusted before each of the following tests to assure that the indicators are centered at 0.
(A) The VHAD and an unlighted headlamp assembly shall be stabilized at 20 ±5 degrees F (−7 ±3 degrees C) in a circulating air environmental test chamber. After a period of 30 minutes, when measured at that soak temperature, the variation from correct horizontal of vertical aim shall not exceed ±0.2 degree, and ±0.1 degree, respectively.
(B) The VHAD, and the headlamp assembly with its highest wattage filament (or combination of filaments intended to be used simultaneously) energized at its design voltage, shall then be stabilized at 100 ±5 degrees F (38 ±3 degrees C) in a circulating air environmental test chamber. After a period of 30 minutes, when measured at that soak temperature, the variation from correct horizontal and vertical aim shall not exceed ±0.2 degree, and ±0.1 degree, respectively.
(C) The VHAD and an unlighted headlamp assembly shall then be placed in a circulating air environmental test chamber and exposed to a temperature of 140 ±5 degrees F (60 ±3 degrees C) for 24 hours, followed by a temperature of −40 ±5 degrees F (−40 ±3 degrees C) for 24 hours and then permitted to return to room temperature, after which the VHAD and headlamp assembly shall show no damage which would impair its ability to perform as specified herein. The variation from correct horizontal or vertical aim shall not exceed ±0.2 degree, and ±0.1 degree, respectively.
(D) The VHAD and headlamp assembly shall then be tested according to the corrosion test procedure of paragraph S7.8.5.1(c).
(E) The VHAD and headlamp assembly shall then be tested for photometric compliance as specified in paragraphs S7.8.5.2(c)(1) and (2).
S7.8.5.3 Visual/optical aiming. Each visually/optically aimable headlamp shall be designed to conform to the following requirements:
(a) Vertical aim, lower beam. Each lower beam headlamp shall have a cutoff in the beam pattern. It may be either on the left side or the right side of the optical axis, but once chosen for a particular headlamp system's design, the side chosen for the cutoff shall not be changed for any headlamps intended to be used as replacements for those system's headlamps.
(1) Vertical position of cutoff. The headlamp shall be aimed vertically so that the cutoff is on the left side, at 0.4 degree down from the H-H line, or on the right side, at the H-H line.
(2) Vertical gradient. The gradient of the cutoff measured at either 2.5 degrees L or 2.0 degrees R shall be not less than 0.13 based on the procedure of S7.8.5.3, paragraph (a)(5).
(3) Horizontal position of the cutoff. The width shall be not less than two degrees, with not less than two degrees of its actual width centered at either 2.5 degrees L, or 2.0 degrees R.
(4) Maximum inclination of cutoff. The vertical location of the highest gradient at the ends of the minimum width shall be within ±0.2 degree of the vertical location of the maximum gradient measured at the appropriate vertical line (at either 2.5 degrees L for a left side cutoff, or 2.0 degrees R for a right side cutoff.)
(5) Measuring the cutoff parameter. (i) The headlamp shall be mounted on a fixture which simulates its actual design location on any vehicle for which the headlamp is intended. The fixture, with the headlamp installed shall be attached to the goniometer table in such a way that the fixture alignment axes are coincident with the goniometer axes. The headlamp shall be energized at the specified test voltage.
(ii) The headlamp beam pattern shall be aimed with the cutoff at the H-H axis. There shall be no adjustment, shimming, or modification of the horizontal axis of the headlamp or test fixture, unless the headlamp is equipped with a VHAD. In this case the VHAD shall be adjusted to zero.
(iii) A vertical scan of the beam pattern shall be conducted for a headlamp with a left side gradient by aligning the goniometer on a vertical line at 2.5 degrees L and scanning from 1.5 degrees U to 1.5 degrees D. For a headlamp with a right side gradient, a vertical scan of the beam pattern shall be conducted by aligning the goniometer on a vertical line at 2.0 degrees R and scanning from 1.5 degrees U to 1.5 degrees D.
(iv) Determine the maximum gradient within the range of the scan by using the formula: G = log E( a )-log E( a +0.1), where “G” is the gradient, “E” is illumination and “ a ” is vertical angular position. The maximum value of the gradient “G” determines the vertical angular location of the cutoff. Perform vertical scans at 1.0 degree L and R of the measurement point of the maximum gradient to determine the inclination.
(b) Horizontal aim, lower beam. There shall be no adjustment of horizontal aim unless the headlamp is equipped with a horizontal VHAD. If the headlamp has a VHAD, it shall be set to zero.
(c) Vertical aim, upper beam. (1) If the upper beam is combined in a headlamp with a lower beam, the vertical aim of the upper beam shall not be changed from the aim set using the procedures of paragraphs S7.8.5.3(a) and (b) used for the lower beam.
(2) If the upper beam is not combined in a headlamp with a lower beam, the vertical aim of the upper beam shall be adjusted so that the maximum beam intensity is located on the H-H axis.
(d) Horizontal aim, upper beam. (1) If the upper beam is combined in a headlamp with a lower beam, the horizontal aim of the upper beam shall not be changed from the aim set using the procedures of paragraphs S7.8.5.3 (a) and (b) used for the lower beam.
(2) If the upper beam is not combined in a headlamp with the lower beam and has fixed horizontal aim or has a horizontal VHAD, then the headlamp shall be mounted on a fixture which simulates its actual design location on any vehicle for which the headlamp is intended. The fixture, with the headlamp installed shall be attached to the goniometer table in such a way that the fixture alignment axes are coincident with the goniometer axes. The headlamp shall be energized at 12.8 ±0.20 mV. There shall be no adjustment, shimming, or modification of the horizontal axis of the headlamp or test fixture, unless the headlamp is equipped with a VHAD. In this case the VHAD shall be adjusted to zero.
(3) If the upper beam is not combined in a headlamp with a lower beam, and it does not have a VHAD, the horizontal aim of the upper beam shall be adjusted so that the maximium beam intensity is located on the V-V axis.
(e) Photometric Requirements and Measurement. (1) Instead of being designed to conform to the photometric requirements of Figures 15–1, 17–1, 27–1 or 28–1, a visually/optically aimable headlamp shall be designed to conform to the requirements of Figures 15–2, 17–2, 27–2 or 28–2 when tested in accordance with paragraph (2) and SAE J575 DEC88, with the distance from the photometer to the headlamp no less than 18.3 m.
(2) If the lower beam has a left side cutoff, reaim the headlamp vertically to place the maximum gradient found in paragraph S7.8.5.3 at 0.4 degree below the H-H line. For a headlamp with a lower beam right side cutoff, place the maximum gradient found in paragraph S7.8.5.3 at the H-H line. For an upper beam, the headlamp would already be aimed at the end of the procedure found in paragraph S7.8.5.3. A 0.25 degree reaim is permitted in any direction at any test point.
(f) Marking —(1) Headlamp optical axis mark. There shall be a mark or markings identifying the optical axis of the headlamp visible from the front of the headlamp when installed on the vehicle, to assure proper horizontal and vertical alignment of the aiming screen or optical aiming equipment with the headlamp being aimed. The manufacturer is free to choose the design of the mark or markings. The mark or markings may be on the interior or exterior of the lens or indicated by a mark or central structure on the interior or exterior of the headlamp.
(2) Visual/optical aimability identification marks. (i) The lens of a lower beam headlamp shall be marked “VOL” if the headlamp is intended to be visually/optically aimed using the left side of the lower beam pattern.
(ii) The lens of a lower beam headlamp shall be marked “VOR” if the headlamp is intended to be visually/optically aimed using the right side of the lower beam pattern.
(iii) The lens of each sealed beam or integral beam headlamp shall be marked “VOR” if the headlamp is of a type that was manufactured before May 1, 1997, and if such headlamp type has been redesigned since then to be visually/optically aimable.
(iv) The lens of a headlamp that is solely an upper beam headlamp and intended to be visually/optically aimed using the upper beam shall be marked “VO”.
(v) Each letter used in marking according to this paragraph shall be not less than 3 mm. high.
S7.9 Motorcycles. Each motorcycle shall be equipped with a headlighting system designed to conform to the following requirements.
S7.9.1 A motorcycle manufactured before September 1, 2000, may be equipped with—
(a) A headlighting system designed to conform to SAE Standard J584 Motorcycle Headlamps April 1964, or to SAE Standard J584 April 1964 with the photometric specifications of Figure 32 and the upper beam aimability specifications of paragraph S7.9.3; or
(b) One half of any headlighting system specified in S7.1 through S7.6 which provides both a full upper beam and full lower beam. Where more than one lamp must be used, the lamps shall be mounted vertically, with the lower beam as high as practicable.
S7.9.2 A motorcycle manufactured on or after September 1, 2000, shall be equipped with—
(a) A headlighting system designed to conform to SAE Standard J584 Motorcycle Headlamps April 1964 with the photometric specifications of Figure 32 and the upper beam aimability specifications of paragraph S7.9.3; or
(b) A headlighting system that conforms to S7.9.1(b).
S7.9.3 The upper beam of a multiple beam headlamp designed to conform to the photometric requirements of Figure 32 shall be aimed photoelectrically during the photometric test in the manner prescribed in SAE Standard J584 OCT93 Motorcycle Headlamps.
S7.9.4 Motorcycle headlamp modulation system.
S7.9.4.1 A headlamp on a motorcycle may be wired to modulate either the upper beam or the lower beam from its maximum intensity to a lesser intensity, provided that:
(a) The rate of modulation shall be 240 ±40 cycles per minute.
(b) The headlamp shall be operated at maximum power for 50 to 70 percent of each cycle.
(c) The lowest intensity at any test point shall be not less than 17 percent of the maximum intensity measured at the same point.
(d) The modulator switch shall be wired in the power lead of the beam filament being modulated and not in the ground side of the circuit.
(e) Means shall be provided so that both the lower beam and upper beam remain operable in the event of a modulator failure.
(f) The system shall include a sensor mounted with the axis of its sensing element perpendicular to a horizontal plane. Headlamp modulation shall cease whenever the level of light emitted by a tungsten filament light operating at 3000° Kelvin is either less than 270 lux (25 foot-candles) of direct light for upward pointing sensors or less than 60 lux (5.6 foot-candles) of reflected light for downward pointing sensors. The light is measured by a silicon cell type light meter that is located at the sensor and pointing in the same direction as the sensor. A Kodak Gray Card (Kodak R–27) is placed at ground level to simulate the road surface in testing downward pointing sensors.
(g) When tested in accordance with the test profile shown in Figure 9, the voltage drop across the modulator when the lamp is on at all test conditions for 12 volt systems and 6 volt systems shall not be greater than .45 volt. The modulator shall meet all the provisions of the standard after completion of the test profile shown in Figure 9.
(h) Means shall be provided so that both the lower and upper beam function at design voltage when the headlamp control switch is in either the lower or upper beam position when the modulator is off.
S7.9.4.2(a) Each motorcycle headlamp modulator not intended as original equipment, or its container, shall be labeled with the maximum wattage, and the minimum wattage appropriate for its use. Additionally, each such modulator shall comply with S7.9.4.1 (a) through (g) when connected to a headlamp of the maximum rated power and a headlamp of the minimum rated power, and shall provide means so that the modulated beam functions at design voltage when the modulator is off.
(b) Instructions, with a diagram, shall be provided for mounting the light sensor including location on the motorcycle, distance above the road surface, and orientation with respect to the light.
S7.9.5 Each replaceable bulb headlamp that is designed to meet the photometric requirements of paragraph S7.9.1(a) or paragraph S7.9.2(a) and that is equipped with a light source other than a replaceable light source meeting the requirements of paragraph S7.7, shall have the word “motorcycle” permanently marked on the lens in characters not less than 0.114 in. (3 mm) in height.
S7.9.6 A headlamp system shall be installed on a motorcycle in accordance with the requirements of this paragraph.
S7.9.6.1 The headlamp system shall be located on the front of the motorcycle.
S7.9.6.2 (a) If the system consists of a single headlamp, it shall be mounted on the vertical centerline of the motorcycle. If the headlamp contains more than one light source, each light source shall be mounted on the vertical centerline with the upper beam no higher than the lower beam, or horizontally disposed about the vertical centerline and mounted at the same height. If the light sources are horizontally disposed about the vertical centerline, the distance between the closest edges of the effective projected luminous lens area in front of the light sources shall not be greater than 200 mm (8 in.).
(b) If the system consists of two headlamps, each of which provides both an upper and lower beam, the headlamps shall be mounted either at the same height and symmetrically disposed about the vertical centerline or mounted on the vertical centerline. If the headlamps are horizontally disposed about the vertical centerline, the distance between the closest edges of their effective projected luminous lens areas shall not be greater than 200 mm (8 in.).
(c) If the system consists of two headlamps, one of which provides an upper beam and one of which provides the lower beam, the headlamps shall be located on the vertical centerline with the upper beam no higher than the lower beam, or horizontally disposed about the vertical centerline and mounted at the same height. If the headlamps are horizontally disposed about the vertical centerline, the distance between the closest edges of their effective projected luminous lens areas shall not be greater than 200 mm (8 in.).
S8 Tests and Procedures for Integral Beam and Replaceable Bulb Headlighting Systems. When tested in accordance with the following procedures, each integral beam headlamp shall meet the requirements of paragraph S7.4, and each replaceable bulb headlamp shall meet the requirements of paragraph S7.5. Ballasts required to operate specific gas mixture light sources shall be included in the tests specified in paragraphs S8.1 and S8.4 though S8.7.
S8.1 Photometry. Each headlamp to which paragraph S8 applies shall be tested according to paragraphs 4.1 and 4.1.4 of SAE Standard J1383 APR85 for meeting the applicable photometric requirements, after each test specified in paragraphs S8.2, S8.3, S8.5, S8.6.1, S8.6.2, S8.7, and S8.10.1 and S8.10.2, if applicable. A1/4degree reaim is permitted in any direction at any test point.
S8.2 Abrasion. (a) A headlamp shall be mounted in the abrasion test fixture in the manner indicated in Figure 5 with the lens facing upward.
(b) An abrading pad meeting the requirements in paragraphs (c)(1) through (c)(4) of this section shall be cycled back and forth (1 cycle) for 11 cycles at 4 ±0.8 in. (10 cm ±2 cm) per second over at least 80 percent of the lens surface, including all the area between the upper and lower aiming pads, but not including lens trim rings and edges.
(c)(1) The abrading pad shall be not less than 1.0 ±.04 in. (2.5 cm ±.1 cm) wide, constructed of 0000 steel wool, and rubber cemented to a rigid base shaped to the same vertical contour of the lens. The “grain” of the pad shall be perpendicular to the direction of motion.
(2) The abrading pad support shall be equal in size to the pad and the center of the support surface shall be within ±.08 in. ( ±2 mm) of parallel to the lens surface.
(3) The density of the abrading pad shall be such that when the pad is mounted to its support and is resting unweighted on the lens, the base of the pad shall be no closer than .125 in. (3.2 mm) to the lens at its closest point.
(4) When mounted on its support and resting on the lens of the test headlamp, the abrading pad shall then be weighted such that a pad pressure of 2.0 ±.15 psi (14 ±1 KPa) exists at the center and perpendicular to the face of the lens.
(d) A pivot shall be used if it is required to follow the contour of the lens.
(e) Unused steel wool shall be used for each test.
S8.3 Chemical resistance. (a) The entire exterior lens surface of the headlamp in the headlamp test fixture and top surface of the lens-reflector joint shall be wiped once to the left and once to the right with a 6-inch square soft cotton cloth (with pressure equally applied) which has been saturated once in a container with 2 ounces of a test fluid as listed in paragraph (b). The lamp shall be wiped within 5 seconds after removal of the cloth from the test fluid.
(b) The test fluids are:
(1) ASTM Reference Fuel C, which is composed of Isooctane 50% volume and Toluene 50% volume. Isooctane must conform to A2.7 in Annex 2 of the Motor Fuels Section of the 1985 Annual Book of ASTM Standards, Vol. 05.04, and Toluene must conform to ASTM specification D362–84, Standard Specification for Industrial Grade Toluene. ASTM Reference Fuel C must be used as specified in:
(i) Paragraph A2.3.2 and A2.3.3 of Annex 2 to Motor Fuels, Section 1 in the 1985 Annual Book of ASTM Standards; and
(ii) OSHA Standard 29 CFR 1910.106— Handling Storage and Use of Flammable Combustible Liquids.
(2) Tar remover (consisting by volume of 45% xylene and 55% petroleum base mineral spirits).
(3) Power steering fluid (as specified by the vehicle manufacturer for use in the motor vehicle on which the headlamp is intended to be installed).
(4) Windshield washer fluid consisting of 0.5% monoethanolamine with the remainder 50% concentration of methanol/distilled water by volume.
(5) Antifreeze (50% concentration of ethylene glycol/distilled water by volume).
(c) After the headlamp has been wiped with the test fluid, it shall be stored in its designed operating attitude for 48 hours at a temperature of 73 °F ±7° (23 °C ±4°) and a relative humidity of 30 ±10 percent. At the end of the 48-hour period, the headlamp shall be wiped clean with a soft dry cotton cloth and visually inspected.
S8.4 Corrosion. (a) A connector test shall be performed on each filament circuit prior to the test in subparagraph (b) according to Figure 1 and SAE Standard J580 DEC86. The power source shall be set to provide 12. 8 volts and the resistance shall be set to produce 10 amperes.
(b) The headlamp with connector attached to the terminals, unfixtured and in its designed operating attitude with all drain holes, breathing devices or other designed openings in their normal operating positions, shall be subjected to a salt spray (fog) test in accordance with ASTM B117–73, Method of Salt Spray (Fog) Testing, for 240 hours, consisting of ten successive 24-hour periods. During each period, the headlamp shall be mounted in the middle of the chamber and exposed for 23 hours to the salt spray. The spray shall not be activated during the 24th hour. The bulb shall be removed from the headlamp and from the test chamber during the one hour of salt spray deactivation and reinserted for the start of the next test period, at the end of the first and last three 23-hour periods of salt spray exposure, and at the end of any two of the fourth through seventh 23-hour periods of salt-spray exposure. The test chamber shall be closed at all times except for a maximum of 2 minutes which is allowed for removal or replacement of a bulb during each period. After the ten periods, the lens reflector unit without the bulb shall be immersed in deionized water for 5 minutes, then secured and allowed to dry by natural convection only.
(c) Using the voltage, resistance and pretest set up of paragraph (a) the current in each filament circuit shall be measured after the test conducted in paragraph (b).
S8.5 Dust. The headlamp, mounted on a headlamp test fixture, with all drain holes, breathing devices or other designed openings in their normal operating positions, shall be positioned within a cubical box, with inside measurements of 35.4 in. (900 mm) on each side or larger if required for adequate wall clearance, i.e., a distance of at least 5.9 in. (150 mm) between the headlamp and any wall of the box. The box shall contain 9.9 lb. (4.5 kg) of fine powdered cement which conforms to the ASTM C150–77 specification for Portland Cement. Every 15 minutes, the cement shall be agitated by compressed air or fan blower(s) by projecting blasts of air for a two-second period in a downward direction so that the cement is diffused as uniformly as possible throughout the entire box. This test shall be continued for five hours after which the exterior surfaces of the headlamp shall be wiped clean.
S8.6 Temperature and internal heat test. A headlamp with one or more replaceable light sources shall be tested according to paragraphs S8.6.1 and S8.6.2. Tests shall be made with all filaments lighted at design voltage that are intended to be used simultaneously in the headlamp and which in combination draw the highest total wattage. These include but are not limited to filaments used for turn signal lamps, fog lamps, parking lamps, and headlamp lower beams lighted with upper beams when the wiring harness is so connected on the vehicle. If a turn signal is included in the headlamp assembly, it shall be operated at 90 flashes a minute with a 75 ±2% current “on time.” If the lamp produces both the upper and lower beam, it shall be tested in both the upper beam mode and the lower beam mode under the conditions above described, except for a headlamp with a single Types HB1 or HB2 light source.
S8.6.1 Temperature cycle. A headlamp, mounted on a headlamp test fixture, shall be subjected to 10 complete consecutive cycles having the thermal cycle profile shown in Figure 6. During the hot cycle, the lamp, shall be energized commencing at point “A” of Figure 6 and de-energized at point “B.” Separate or single test chambers may be used to generate the environment of Figure 6. All drain holes, breathing devices or other openings or vents of the headlamps shall be in their normal operating positions.
S8.6.2 Internal Heat Test. (a) The headlamp lens surface that would normally be exposed to road dirt shall be uniformly sprayed with any appropriate mixture of dust and water or other materials to reduce the photometric output at the H-V test point of the upper beam (or the1/2D–11/2R test point of the lower beam as appropriate) to 25 ±2% of the output originally measured in the photometric test conducted pursuant to paragraphs S7.4(i), or S7.5 (a) through (e), as applicable. A headlamp with a single Types HB1 or HB2 light source shall be tested on the upper beam only. Such reduction shall be determined under the same conditions as that of the original photometric measurement.
(b) After the photometric output of the lamp has been reduced as specified in paragraph (a), the lamp and its mounting hardware shall be mounted in an environmental chamber in a manner similar to that indicated in Figure 7 “Dirt/Ambient Test Setup.” The headlamp shall be soaked for one hour at a temperature of 95 + 7 −0 degrees F (35 + 4 −0 degrees C) and then the lamp shall be energized according to paragraph S8.6 for one hour in a still air condition, allowing the temperature to rise from the soak temperature.
(c) The lamp shall be returned to a room ambient temperature of 73 + 7 −0 degrees F (23 + 4 −0 degrees C) and a relative humidity of 30 ±10% and allowed to stabilize to the room ambient temperature. The lens shall then be cleaned.
S8.7 Humidity. (a) The test fixture consists of a horizontal steel plate to which three threaded steel or aluminum rods of1/2inch diameter are screwed vertically behind the headlamp. The headlamp assembly is clamped to the vertical rods, which are behind the headlamp. All attachments to the headlamp assembly are made behind the lens and vents or openings, and are not within 2 inches laterally of a vent inlet or outlet.
(b) The mounted headlamp assembly is oriented in its design operating position, and is placed in a controlled environment at a temperature of 100+7−0 degrees F (38+4−0 degrees C) with a relative humidity of not less than 90 percent. All drain holes, breathing devices, and other openings are in their normal operation positions for all phases of the humidity test. The headlamp shall be subjected to 24 consecutive 3-hour test cycles. In each cycle, it shall be energized for 1 hour at design voltage with the highest combination of filament wattages that are intended to be used, and then de-energized for 2 hours. If the headlamp incorporates a turn signal, it shall flash at 90 flashes per minute with a 75±2 percent current “on-time.”
(c) Within 3 minutes after the completion of the 24th cycle, the air flow test will begin. The following shall occur: the mounted assembly shall be removed, placed in an insulating box and covered with foam material so that there is no visible air space around the assembly; the box shall be closed, taken to the air flow test chamber, and placed within it. Inside the chamber, the assembly with respect to the air flow, shall be oriented in its design operating position. The assembly is positioned in the chamber so that the center of the lens is in the center of the opening of the air flow entry duct during the test. The headlamp has at least 3 inches clearance on all sides, and at least 4 inches to the entry and exit ducts at the closest points. If vent tubes are used which extend below the lamp body, the 3 inches are measured from the bottom of the vent tube or its protection. The temperature of the chamber is 73+7−0 degrees F (23+4−0 degrees C) with a relative humidity of 30+10−0 percent. The headlamp is not energized.
(d) Before the test specified in paragraph (e) of this section, the uniformity of the air flow in the empty test chamber at a plane 4 inches downstream of the air entry duct shall have been measured over a 4-inch square grid. The uniformity of air flow at each grid point is ±10 percent of the average air flow specified in paragraph (e) of this section.
(e) The mounted assembly in the chamber shall be exposed, for one hour, to an average air flow of 330+0−30 ft/min. as measured with an air velocity measuring probe having an accuracy of ±3 percent in the 330 ft/min range. The average air flow is the average of the velocity recorded at six points around the perimeter of the lens. The six points are determined as follows: At the center of the lens, construct a horizontal plane. The first two points are located in the plane, 1 inch outward from the intersection of the plane and each edge of the lens. Then, trisect the distance between these two points and construct longitudinal vertical planes at the two intermediate locations formed by the trisection. The four remaining points are located in the vertical planes, one inch above the top edge of the lens, and one inch below the bottom edge of the lens.
(f) After one hour, the headlamp is removed and inspected for moisture.
S8.8 Vibration. A vibration test shall be conducted in accordance with the procedures of SAE Standard J575e Tests for Motor Vehicle Lighting Devices and Components August 1970, and the following: the table on the adapter plate shall be of sufficient size to completely contain the test fixture base with no overhang. The vibration shall be applied in the vertical axis of the headlamp system as mounted on the vehicle. The filament shall not be energized.
S8.9 Sealing. An unfixtured headlamp in its design mounting position shall be placed in water at a temperature of 176 ±5 degrees F (60 ±3 degrees C) for one hour. The headlamp shall be energized in its highest wattage mode, with the test voltage at 12.8 ±0.1 V. during immersion. The lamp shall then be de-energized and immediately submerged in its design mounting position into water at 32 +5 −0 degrees F (0 +3 −0 degrees C). The water shall be in a pressurized vessel, and the pressure shall be increased to 10 psi (70 kPa), upon placing the lamp in the water. The lamp shall remain in the pressurized vessel for a period of thirty minutes. This entire procedure shall be repeated for four cycles. Then the lamp shall be inspected for any signs of water on its interior. During the high temperature portion of the cycles, the lamp shall be observed for signs of air escaping from its interior. If any water occurs on the interior or air escapes, the lamp is not a sealed lamp.
S8.10 Chemical and corrosion resistance of reflectors of replaceable lens headlamps.
S8.10.1 Chemical resistance. (a) With the headlamp in the headlamp test fixture and the lens removed, the entire surface of the reflector that receives light from a headlamp light source shall be wiped once to the left and once to the right with a 6-inch square soft cotton cloth (with pressure equally applied) which has been saturated once in a container with 2 ounces of one of the test fluids listed in paragraph (b). The lamp shall be wiped within 5 seconds after removal of the cloth from the test fluid.
(b) The test fluids are:
(1) Tar remover (consisting by volume of 45% xylene and 55% petroleum base mineral spirits);
(2) Mineral spirits; or
(3) Fluids other than water contained in the manufacturer's instructions for cleaning the reflector.
(c) After the headlamp has been wiped with the test fluid, it shall be stored in its designed operating attitude for 48 hours at a temperature of 73 °F ±7° (23 °C ±4°) and a relative humidity of 30 ±10 percent. At the end of the 48-hour period, the headlamp shall be wiped clean with a soft dry cotton cloth and visually inspected.
S8.10.2 Corrosion. (a) The headlamp with the lens removed, unfixtured and in its designed operating attitude with all drain holes, breathing devices or other designed openings in their normal operating positions, shall be subjected to a salt spray (fog) test in accordance with ASTM B117–73, Method of Salt Spray (Fog) Testing, for 24 hours, while mounted in the middle of the chamber.
(b) Afterwards, the headlamp shall be stored in its designed operating attitude for 48 hours at a temperature of 73 °F ±7° (23 °C ±4°) and a relative humidity of 30 ±10 percent and allowed to dry by natural convection only. At the end of the 48-hour period, the reflector shall be cleaned according to the instructions supplied with the headlamp manufacturer's replacement lens, and inspected. The lens and seal shall then be attached according to these instructions and the headlamp tested for photometric performance.
S9. Deflection test for replaceable light sources. With the light source rigidly mounted in a fixture in a manner indicated in Figure 8, a force 4.0 ±0.1 pounds (17.8 ±0.4N) is applied at a distance “A” from the reference plane perpendicular to the longitudinal axis of the glass capsule and parallel to the smallest dimension of the pressed glass capsule seal. The force shall be applied (using a rod with a hard rubber tip with a minimum spherical radius of .039 in (1 mm)) radially to the surface of the glass capsule in four locations in a plane parallel to the reference plane and spaced at a distance “A” from that plane. These force applications shall be spaced 90 degrees apart starting at the point perpendicular to the smallest dimension of the pressed seal of the glass capsule. The bulb deflection shall be measured at the glass capsule surface at 180 degrees opposite to the force application. Distance “A” for a replaceable light source other than an HB Type shall be the dimension provided in accordance with appendix A of part 564 of this chapter, section I.A.1 if the light source has a lower beam filament, or as specified in section I.B.1 if the light source has only an upper beam filament.
S10 Simultaneous Aim Photometry Tests —(a) Type F Headlamp Systems. The assembly shall be located on a goniometer placed not less than 60 feet (18.3m) from the photometer. The LF unit shall be aimed mechanically by centering the unit on the photometer axis and by aligning the aiming plane of the lens perpendicular to the photometer axis. Then the assembly shall be moved in a plane parallel to the established aiming plane of the LF headlamp until the UF headlamp is centered on the photometer axis. Photometry measurements of the UF photometry unit shall be completed using the aiming plane so established, and the procedures of section 4.1 and 4.1.4 Standard J1383 APR85, and Figure 15–1 or Figure 15–2. A reaim tolerance of ±1/4degree is permitted in any direction at any test point.
(b) Integral Beam Headlamp Systems. The assembly used for simultaneously aiming more than one integral beam headlamp shall be placed on a test fixture on a goniometer located not less than 60 feet (18.3 m.) from the photometer. The assembly shall be aimed by centering the geometric center of the lower beam lens(es) on the photometer axis and by aligning the photometer axis to be perpendicular to the aiming reference plane or appropriate vertical plane defined by the manufacturer of any lower beam contribut